2008 Chevrolet Tahoe Owners PDF

2008 Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban Owner Manual M
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-11 Towing ................................................... 4-45
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-30 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-51 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Airbag System ......................................... 1-76 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-92 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-12
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-51
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-52
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10 Front Axle ............................................... 5-53
Windows ................................................. 2-19 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-55
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-22 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-58
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-26 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-61
Mirrors .................................................... 2-49 Tires ...................................................... 5-63
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-58 Appearance Care ................................... 5-106
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-60 Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-115
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-64 Electrical System .................................... 5-116
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-71 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-124
Sunroof .................................................. 2-74 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-23 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-37 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-55 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-82 Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, 1-800-551-4123
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the www.helminc.com
names TAHOE, SUBURBAN, and Z71 are registered Propriétaires Canadiens
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
the product after that time without notice. For vehicles Helm Incorporated
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General P.O. Box 07130
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division Detroit, MI 48207
wherever it appears in this manual. 1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may be available in www.helminc.com
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 15854806 A First Printing 2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
ii
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to {CAUTION:
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures These mean there is something that could hurt
and words work together to explain things. you or other people.
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
Index If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A good place to quickly locate information about the A circle with a slash
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an through it is a safety
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the symbol which means
page number where it can be found. “Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let this
Safety Warnings and Symbols happen.”
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.

A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual. The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
Notice: These mean there is something that could the text describing the operation or information
damage your vehicle. relating to a specific component, control, message,
A notice tells about something that can damage the gage, or indicator.
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-57
Manual Seats ................................................1-2 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-60
Power Seats ..................................................1-3 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4 (LATCH) ..................................................1-61
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-4 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Heated Seats .................................................1-5 Rear Seat Position ....................................1-70
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ....................1-6 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-8 Center Front Seat Position ..........................1-72
Head Restraints ............................................1-10 Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Seat .................................................1-11 Right Front Seat Position ............................1-72
Rear Seats .....................................................1-11 Airbag System ...............................................1-76
Heated Seats ...............................................1-11 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-79
60/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) .............1-12 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-82
Bucket Seats (Second Row) ...........................1-18 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-83
Third Row Seat ............................................1-25 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-84
Safety Belts ...................................................1-30 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-84
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-30 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-86
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-35 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-90
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-43 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-49 Vehicle ....................................................1-91
Lap Belt ......................................................1-49 Restraint System Check ..................................1-92
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-50 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-92
Child Restraints .............................................1-51 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Older Children ..............................................1-51 After a Crash ............................................1-93
Infants and Young Children ............................1-54
1-1
Front Seats To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Power Seats On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-8.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings
to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals on page 1-6 for more information.
1-3
Manual Lumbar Power Lumbar
On vehicles with this feature, turn the knob forward or If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to
rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support. operate this feature are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
1-4
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press Heated Seats
and hold the top of the control.
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press located on the driver’s and passenger’s doors.
and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory heated seat and seatback.
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-6 for more The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
information. feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
as it may during long trips, so should the position of your to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed. show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting your vehicle, press the heated seat
or seatback button again.
1-5
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals To save your positions in memory, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
Your vehicle may have the memory package. recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
The controls for this position.
feature are located on the
driver’s door panel, and See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-55 and
are used to program Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-29
and recall memory settings for more information.
for the driver’s seat, Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
outside mirrors, and the recall their positions.
adjustable throttle and Not all adjustable throttles and brake pedals will
brake pedal. have the ability to save and recall their positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard
indicating that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal
position can be programmed by repeating the above
steps and pressing button 2.
1-6
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in Easy Exit Seat
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat, The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
pedals will move to the position previously stored. With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit
You will hear a single beep. position can be recalled by pressing the exit button.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter You will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature will move back.
is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the
pedal movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat
RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC movement will occur when the key is removed from the
Buttons) on page 3-73 for more information. ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
To stop recall movement of the memory function at any Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73 for
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory more information.
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal switch. The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the programmed using the DIC.
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73.
stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling,
see your dealer for service.
1-7
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
locked. job when you are reclined like this.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-8
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,

you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt To recline the seatback:
properly. 1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
of the seat(s). locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-9
Power Reclining Seatbacks Head Restraints
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control

used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
rearward. is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the in a crash.
control forward.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-10
Pull the head restraint up Center Seat
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback
the release button (A), doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for
located on the top the driver and passenger when the center seat is
of the seatback, not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the
while you push the seatback is folded down.
head restraint down.
Rear Seats
Heated Seats
If the rear seats have the
heated seat feature, the
The front seats may have head restraints that also tilt buttons used to control this
forward and rearward. feature are located on
To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of the restraint the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
while pressing the button (B), located on the inboard panel.
side of the head restraint, and move it forward or
rearward until the desired locking position is reached.
Try to move the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The second row seats may have head rests that can be
adjusted up and down, but they do not tilt. Driver’s Side RSA
Heated Seat Button
Only shown
M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion, press the
button with the heated seat symbol.
1-11
A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to
cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
and low, and to turn it off. Indicator bars next to the
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low. 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
The heated seats are off when the ignition is off.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
60/40 Split Bench Seat safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
(Second Row) before folding a rear seat.
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s) can
be folded for additional cargo space or folded and
tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats,
if your vehicle has them. These seats will have either the
manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat
release fold and tumble feature.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the

seat, to release the seatback.
1-12
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position.
3. Lift the same lever
again to release the
rear of the seat from
the floor. The seat
will tumble forward.
The seatback will fold forward automatically.

Leaving the seatback in this position creates a
flat load floor.
1-13
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the {CAUTION:
following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is properly attached, or twisted will not provide
not latched to the floor. the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
{CAUTION: to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always 3. Make sure the safety belt in the center seating
position is not caught between the two seats
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
and is not twisted.
locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-14
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the
Third Row Seats
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while the
second row is folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your
2. Lift the lever(s), located on the bottom rear of the
vehicle has them, do the following:
second row seat(s) on the inboard side, to release
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, the seatback. The seatback will fold forward.
or on the seat.
3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the automatically.
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
before folding a rear seat.
1-15
Automatic Release Fold and 2. From the front seats,
press one of the
Tumble Feature automatic seat release
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature buttons located on
to work. the overhead console.
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)
{CAUTION:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat Overhead Console
when someone is sitting in the seat, could Buttons shown, Panel
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always Button similar
make sure there is no one sitting in the seat
When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
before pressing the automatic seat release has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
button. the button on the panel behind either rear door.
One press of the button automatically folds
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
There will be a slight delay between the folding of
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
or on the seat.
1-16
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting
Position {CAUTION:
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is properly attached, or twisted will not provide
not latched to the floor. the protection needed in a crash. The person
After raising the rear seatback, always check
{CAUTION: to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could 3. Make sure that the safety belt in the center seating
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always position is not caught between the two seats and is
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is not twisted.
locked.

1-17
Folding and Tumbling the Second Row 2. Press the automatic
Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or seat release button
located on the
Outside panel behind the rear
doors.
{CAUTION:
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger Driver’s Side Rear Panel
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to Button shown
One press of the button automatically folds the
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if There will be a slight delay between the folding of
your vehicle has them, do the following: the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or
on the seat. Bucket Seats (Second Row)
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the reclined, the seats can be folded for additional cargo
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts space, or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to
and return them to their normal stowed position the third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These
before folding a rear seat. seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature
or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature.
1-18
Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
locked.

1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat. locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
locked.
1-19
Manual Fold and Tumble Feature
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following:
on the seat.
The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback

in this position creates a flat load floor.
2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the

seat, to release the seatback.
1-20
If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position
seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the
upright position. To return the seat to the sitting position, do the
following:
3. Lift the lever again to 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.
release the rear of the The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is
seat from the floor. not latched to the floor.
The seat will tumble
forward.
{CAUTION:
locked.

1-21
Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from 2. Lift the lever, located
the Third Row Seats on the bottom rear of
the second row seat on
the inboard side, to
release the seatback.
{CAUTION: The seatback will
fold forward.
seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat
To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, from the floor. The seat will tumble forward.
if your vehicle has them, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
1-22
Automatic Release Fold and 2. From the front seats,
press one of the
Tumble Feature automatic seat release
The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature buttons located on
to work. the overhead console.
{CAUTION:
Automatically folding and tumbling the seat Overhead Console
when someone is sitting in the seat, could Buttons shown
When accessing the third row seats, if your vehicle
make sure there is no one sitting in the seat
has them, from the outside of the vehicle, press
before pressing the automatic seat release the button on the panel behind either rear door.
button.
One press of the button automatically folds
the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward.
To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: There will be a slight delay between the folding of
the seatback and the tumbling of the seat.
1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of,
or on the seat.
1-23
Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Folding and Tumbling the Second Row
Position Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or
To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: Outside
1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The
seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched
to the floor.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move seating position. Push and pull on the seat to
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could make sure it is locked into place.
locked. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if
your vehicle has them, do the following:
on the seat.
1-24
2. Press the automatic Folding the Seatback(s)
seat release button
located on the To fold the seatback, do the following:
panel behind the rear 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
doors.
2. Remove all items on the seat cushion.
Driver’s Side Rear Panel 3. Lift the release lever,
Button shown located on the bottom
One press of the button automatically folds the rear of the seatback
seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. on the outboard side
There will be a slight delay between the folding of of the seat, and the
the seatback and the tumbling of the seat. seatback will fold forward.
Third Row Seat

If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can
be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled, or
removed from the vehicle.
1-25
Unfolding the Seatback(s) Tumbling the Third Row Seat
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo
following: space.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. To tumble the seat, do the following:
2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat.
upright position. 2. Make sure the head rests are completely lowered,
there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat,
and all items are removed from the cupholder
{CAUTION: and storage bin, if the seat is a two-passenger seat.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
If the seatback is not locked, it could move previously listed under “Folding the Seatbacks”.
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could You will not be able to unlatch the seat from
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is 4. Unlatch the seat from
locked. the floor by lifting the
lever located next
to the carrying handle
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is on the rear of the
locked. seat near the bottom.
1-26
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor. 4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is
not latched to the floor.
7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it
is locked. 5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright
position.
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
Returning the Third Row Seat from a {CAUTION:

Tumbled Position If the seatback is not locked, it could move
To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
following: cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Make sure there is nothing that could become
trapped under the seat.
3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting 6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
the lever located next to the carrying handle at the is locked.
bottom rear of the seat.
1-27
Removing the Third Row Seat Installing the Third Row Seat
To remove the seat, do the following: To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions 2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously. the floor and roll the seat forward. The front latches
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback should lock into place. If the latches do not lock,
is folded. try tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly.
3. Unlatch the seat from 3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the
the floor by pulling seat to engage the rear floor latches.
the carrying handle,
located at the rear
of the seat, rearward. {CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track in
the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle.
1-28
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to {CAUTION:
the floor.
5. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
position. properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
{CAUTION: After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
If the seatback is not locked, it could move routed and attached, and are not twisted.
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always 7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is original position over the seatbacks.
locked.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it

is locked.
1-29
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should collision, people riding in these areas are more
not do with safety belts.
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
{CAUTION: belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-39.
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you are You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
restrained properly too. serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-30
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat

on wheels.
1-31
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something.
does not stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-32
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-33
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
Safety Belts home, why should I wear safety belts?
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
if I am wearing a safety belt?
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety does not protect you from things beyond your
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious control, such as bad drivers.
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. of home. And the greatest number of serious
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
upside down. 40 mph (65 km/h).
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to Safety belts are for everyone.
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-34
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-51
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-54. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-35
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

much protection this way.
1-36
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the
lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

much protection this way.
1-37
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-38
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-39
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-40
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-41
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-42
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position, if your
vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 1-49 for more information.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
belt out all the way, you may engage the child the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
belt go back all the way and start again. secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may Belt Extender on page 1-50.
affect the passenger sensing system. See Make sure the release button on the buckle is
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-86. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
1-43
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the

shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
1-44
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
driver and right front passenger position. outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
in a crash.
belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
To move it down, squeeze Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
the buttons (A) on the crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
sides of the height adjuster new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
and move the height Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-93.
adjuster to the desired
position.
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the

shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
1-45
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the second row seat and the third row, if your vehicle
has one. Here is how to install a comfort guide to
the safety belt:
Third Row
If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide
from its storage pocket on the side of the seat.
Second Row
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the interior body.
1-46
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-47
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as

described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Slide the guide into its storage clip on
the interior body or storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
1-48
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-43.
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. along the belt.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that Buckle, position and release it the same way as the
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective
is wearing them properly.
1-49
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never use
it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown

until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-50.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
1-50
Child Restraints The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
Older Children belt until the child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 1-43 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length of
trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-51
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and {CAUTION:
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face Never do this.
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which forces. In a crash, the two children can be
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
in a crash. must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under

Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-43.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-52
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child might slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-53
Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
infants and all other children. Neither the distance can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the vehicle. In addition, young children should not use
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need to use a
the law in every state in the United States and in child restraint.
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION: People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
Children can be seriously injured or strangled not weigh much — until a crash. During a
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
and never allow children to play with the will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
safety belts. on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-54
children, but not for young children and

infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
1-55
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints? {CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Newborn infants need complete support,
Selection of a particular restraint should take including support for the head and neck.
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
and age but also whether or not the restraint will neck is weak and its head weighs so much
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
be used. an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
For most basic types of child restraints, there are the restraint, so the crash forces can be
many different models available. When purchasing a distributed across the strongest part of an
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a Infants should always be secured in
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle appropriate infant restraints.
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-56
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION: A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
The body structure of a young child is quite with the seating surface
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom against the back of
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s the infant.
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
injuries. Young children should always be crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
secured in appropriate child restraints.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-57
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-58
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint Securing the Child Within the
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the Child Restraint
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-61 for more information. A child can {CAUTION:
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the crash if the child is not properly secured in
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the child restraint. Because there are different
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this systems, it is important to refer to the
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
instructions that come with the restraint.
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer. Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with that
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can restraint.
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-59
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they {CAUTION:
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child seriously injured or killed if the right front
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, very close to the inflating airbag.
using safety belts.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-86
for additional information.
1-60
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
{CAUTION: Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
A child in a child restraint in the center front or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
seat can be badly injured or killed by the of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
child restraint in the center front seat. It is restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
always better to secure a child restraint in a Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
rear seat. properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
position.
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
position, study the instructions that came with your child the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. attached using only the top tether and anchor.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
secure the child restraint properly. you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure instructions on how to use the child restraint and
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure its attachments. The following explains how to attach a
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
child is in it. Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-61
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
position that will accommodate a child restraint with vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
lower attachments (B). restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-62
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) Locations
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for j (Lower Anchor):
use with or without the top tether being attached. Seating positions with
Others require the top tether always to be attached. two lower anchors.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be i (Top Tether Anchor):
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for Seating positions with
your child restraint. top tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Second Row — 60/40
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):

top tether anchors.
Second Row — Bucket
1-63
i (Top Tether Anchor): For models with a three passenger third row seat, see
Seating positions with the information following for installing a child restraint
top tether anchors. with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one.
Never install two top tethers using the same top tether
anchor.
For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear
right side passenger and center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in
Third Row — Two the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
Passenger
i (Top Tether Anchor):

top tether anchors.
Third Row — Three

Passenger
1-64
Second Row Seat — Bucket Second Row Seat — 60/40
For models with bucket second row seating, the top For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top
tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for each seating position in the second row. cushion for each seating position in the second row.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed. restraint will be placed.
1-65
For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat,
there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear
of the seat cushion that can be used for either the
third row center or driver side seating position. Never
install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-60 for
additional information.
Third Row Seat — Two or Three Passenger
For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat, there

is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear
of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver
side seating position in the third row. Never install
two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
1-66
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System {CAUTION:
{CAUTION: Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect anchor or attachment to come loose or even
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be break during a crash. A child or others could be
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a injured if this happens. To help prevent injury to
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed people and damage to your vehicle, attach only
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety one child restraint per anchor.
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-67
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
{CAUTION: seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
Children can be seriously injured or strangled stowed position before folding the rear seat.
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
and the safety belt continues to tighten. lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
Secure any unused safety belts behind the lower attachments or the desired seating position
child restraint so children cannot reach them. does not have lower anchors, secure the child
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
one, after the child restraint has been installed. instructions and the instructions in this manual.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
restraint manufacturer. seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt the child restraint to the lower anchors.
assembly may cause damage to these parts. 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
Make sure when securing unused safety belts the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
behind the child restraint that there is no contact top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has
between the child restraint LATCH attachment parts one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and
and the vehicle’s safety belt assembly. the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
1-68
If the position you are If the position you are
using does not have a using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint headrest or head restraint
and you are using a and you are using a
single tether, route the dual tether, route the tether
tether over the seatback. around the headrest or
head restraint.
If the position you are If the position you are

using does not have a using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint headrest or head restraint
and you are using a and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether single tether, raise the
over the seatback. headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.
1-69
Securing a Child Restraint in a If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
Rear Seat Position on page 1-60.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
position, study the instructions that came with your child 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-61 will show you how.
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-61 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say. Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-70
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-61 for
more information.
1-71
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s Securing a Child Restraint in the
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
Securing a Child Restraint in the secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Center Front Seat Position Put the Restraint on page 1-60.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
{CAUTION: See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-86
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-41
A child in a child restraint in the center front for more information on this, including important safety
seat can be badly injured or killed by the information.
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the center front seat. It is child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
always better to secure a child restraint in a rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat

position.
1-72
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-61
{CAUTION: for how to install your child restraint using LATCH.
If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
seriously injured or killed if the right front for Children (LATCH) on page 1-61 for top tether anchor
locations.
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
very close to the inflating airbag. tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
Even though the passenger sensing system is with the child restraint say that the top strap must
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s be anchored.
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy attached.
under some unusual circumstance, even
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-86
1-73
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-41.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
will show you how.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-74
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-75
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
Airbag System
the vehicle is started. Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on • A frontal airbag for the driver.
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint. • A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make • A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child directly behind the driver.
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat • A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is the person seated directly behind that passenger.
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this • If your vehicle has a third row seat, it will have a
happens, adjust the head restraint. third row roof-rail airbag.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child near the deployment opening.
restraint.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
check with your dealer/retailer.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s along the headliner or trim.
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
1-76
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury {CAUTION:
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job. Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
Here are the most important things to know about the moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
airbag system: crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
{CAUTION: to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle, during a
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal impact.
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes.
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
belt properly — whether or not there is an
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
airbag for that person.
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
1-77
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or protection for adults, but not for young
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit safety belt system nor its airbag system is
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you designed for them. Young children and infants
would be if you were sitting on the edge of need the protection that a child restraint
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help system can provide. Always secure children
keep you in position before and during a properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with Older Children on page 1-51 or Infants and
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as Young Children on page 1-54.
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
1-78
There is an airbag Where Are the Airbags?
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-40
for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

steering wheel.
1-79
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side. If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-80
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags and a third row
passenger seat, the airbags are located in the ceiling
above the rear windows for the outboard passenger
positions in the third row.
1-81
When Should an Airbag Inflate? • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a the vehicle goes straight into the object.
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
help restrain the occupants.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
For example: airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
vehicle hits a moving object. the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags seat. The seat position sensor provides information
that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
a reduced level or at full deployment.
vehicle hits an object does not deform.
1-82
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
See Airbag System on page 1-76. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part
can vary with specific vehicle design. of the airbag module.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in the vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
a severe frontal impact. seating positions.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
1-83
How Does an Airbag Restrain? What Will You See After an
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, Airbag Inflates?
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside so quickly that some people may not even realize
of the vehicle. an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-83.
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
the occupant’s upper body. may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
contain the head and chest of occupants in the the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
rows, if equipped with a third row seat. The rollover leaving the vehicle.
capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the
risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although
no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-82 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-84
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
{CAUTION: Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
the air. This dust could cause breathing airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
problems for people with a history of asthma the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, system will not be there to help protect you in
everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon another crash. A new system will include airbag
as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing modules and possibly other parts. The service
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by
opening a window or a door. If you experience • Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
breathing problems following an airbag module which records information after a crash.
deployment, you should seek medical See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
attention. page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-16.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically airbag system will not work properly. See your
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn dealer/retailer for service.
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-85
Passenger Sensing System The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger sensing system.
airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead
console when you start your vehicle. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
United States Canada including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
will be visible during the system check. When the who are large enough, using safety belts.
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
page 3-41. rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-86
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
{CAUTION: • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be • The system determines that an infant is present in
seriously injured or killed if the right front a rear-facing infant seat.
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the • The system determines that a small child is present
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be in a child restraint.
very close to the inflating airbag. • The system determines that a small child is present
Even though the passenger sensing system is in a booster seat.
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s • A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing the seat for a period of time.
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no • The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
under some unusual circumstance, even child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
the right front seat, always move the front will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-41.
1-87
If a child restraint has been installed and the on When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
Seat Position on page 1-72. may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat that person.
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
on page 1-10. If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
Remove any additional material from the seat such as additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
restraint. upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
check with your dealer/retailer.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
1-88
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which on page 3-40 for more on this, including
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the important safety information.
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-89
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect Vehicle
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has There are parts of the airbag system in several places
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on manual have information about servicing your vehicle
page 1-91 for more information about modifications that and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
can affect how the system operates. see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-15.
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
seatback may interfere with the proper turned off and the battery is disconnected,
operation of the passenger sensing system. an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-90
Adding Equipment to Your trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or
trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change or device, installed under or on top of the seat
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the
from working properly? passenger sensing system. This could either
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s prevent proper deployment of the passenger
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s).
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-86.
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and If you have any questions about this, you should
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, contact Customer Assistance before you modify
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
system for the right front passenger’s position, Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-80
which includes sensors that are part of the for additional important information.
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
1-91
Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the Restraint System Check
airbags from working properly?
A: We have designed our airbag systems to work Checking the Restraint Systems
properly under a wide range of conditions, Safety Belts
including snow plowing with vehicles that have the
optional Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
But do not change or defeat the snow plow’s and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
‘‘tripping mechanism.’’ If you do, it can damage and anchorages are working properly.
your snow plow and your vehicle, and it may cause Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
an airbag inflation. parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
this will affect my airbag system? or frayed, get a new one right away.
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-39 for more
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer information.
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. Belts on page 5-109.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
Airbags
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring. The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-40 for more information.
1-92
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have But the belt assemblies that were used during any
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
For the location of the airbag modules, see What dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-83. See your inspected or replaced.
dealer/retailer for service.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
Replacing Restraint System Parts system parts.
After a Crash New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
{CAUTION: If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
A crash can damage the restraint systems in in this section.
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
may not properly protect the person using it, vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
resulting in serious injury or even death in light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
a crash. To help make sure your restraint are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-40.
systems are working properly after a crash, If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
have them inspected and any necessary Hybrid manual for more information.
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-93
✍ NOTES
1-94
Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3 Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4 Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System PASS-Key® III+ ............................................2-24
Operation ...................................................2-5 PASS-Key® III+ Operation ..............................2-24
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-8 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-26
Doors and Locks ............................................2-10 New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-26
Door Locks ..................................................2-10 Ignition Positions ..........................................2-26
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-27
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-11 Starting the Engine .......................................2-28
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-11 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-29
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-30
Lockout Protection ........................................2-12 Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-31
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................2-13 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-31
Power Liftgate ..............................................2-15 Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-37
Power Running Boards ..................................2-18 Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-38
Windows ........................................................2-19 Parking Brake ..............................................2-43
Power Windows ............................................2-20 Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-44
Sun Visors ...................................................2-21 Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-46
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-46
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-47
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-48
2-1
Section 2 Features and Controls
Mirrors ...........................................................2-49 OnStar® System .............................................2-60
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Universal Home Remote System ......................2-64
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Universal Home Remote System Operation
Display ....................................................2-49 (With Three Round LED) ............................2-64
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-52 Storage Areas ................................................2-71
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-54 Glove Box ...................................................2-71
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ............................2-54 Cupholder(s) ................................................2-71
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-55 Center Console Storage .................................2-71
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-56 Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-72
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-57 Rear Storage Area ........................................2-73
Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................2-57 Rear Seat Armrest ........................................2-73
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-57 Cargo Cover ................................................2-73
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-57 Sunroof .........................................................2-74
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-58
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............2-58
2-2
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all door locks.
2-3
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle. 1. This device may not cause interference.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or 2. This device must accept any interference received,
additional key is needed. including interference that may cause undesired
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, operation of the device.
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Changes or modifications to this system by other than
Be sure you have spare keys. an authorized service facility could void authorization to
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call the Roadside use this equipment.
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
on page 7-7. This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
System • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on snowy weather.
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • Check to determine if battery replacement is
1. This device may not cause interference. necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
2. This device must accept any interference received, section.
including interference that may cause undesired • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
operation of the device. or a qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also
start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter, with the remote start button, provides an
increased operating range of 195 feet (60 m) away.
However, the operating range may be less while
the vehicle is running. As a result, you may need to be
closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to With Remote Start and With Remote Start and
start it. Liftglass (Without Power Liftgate and
There are other conditions which can affect the Remote Start Similar) Liftglass (Without
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Remote Start Similar)
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4. The following functions may be available if your vehicle
has the RKE system:
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this

feature, press /to start the engine from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for additional information.
2-5
Q (Lock): Press Qto lock all the doors. If enabled m (Liftglass): For vehicles with a liftglass, press and
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking hold m to open the liftglass.
lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp when the & (Power Liftgate): For vehicles with a power
lock button is pressed again within five seconds of liftgate, press and hold & to open and close the
the previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73 for to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing.
additional information. Pressing Qwill arm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
on page 2-22. L to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will
flash and the horn will sound three times.
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within three seconds, all remaining Press and hold Lfor more than two seconds to
doors will unlock. If it is dark enough outside, the interior activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds.
until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved
the turn signal lamps will flash twice to indicate to ON/RUN or Lis pressed again. The ignition must
unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization
be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
(With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73. If enabled through
the DIC, the exterior lights will turn on briefly if it is dark
enough outside. See ‘‘Approach Lighting’’ under DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73.
Pressing " on the RKE transmitter will disarm the
content theft-deterrent system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22.
2-6
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-56 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-62 for instructions
on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See 1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for additional 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
information.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body 4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
2-7
Remote Vehicle Start Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside view when doing so. Check local regulations for
of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
heating or air conditioning systems and rear window Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
defogger. Normal operation of the system will return on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, provides an increased range of operation. However, the
the climate control system will default to a heating or range may be less while the vehicle is running. As a
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. result, you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate it off, than you were to turn it on.
control system, the system will turn on at the setting the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional
climate control system and heated seats, the heated information.
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If your
vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, you will need to manually
turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
on page 1-5 for additional information.
2-8
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
transmitter if you have remote start. following:
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature: • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. turn off.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button. • Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
The vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press
and hold the transmitter’s remote start button until • Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote start between driving sequences. The engine will run for
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote 10 minutes after each remote start.
start button again after the vehicle has started will
turn off the ignition. Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
frame, and before the engine stops.
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut For example, if the lock button and then the remote
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
been done. has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine The additional ten minutes are considered a second
is still running, to extend the engine running time remote vehicle start.
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time. one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert started with the key.
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle. After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle
can be remote started again.
2-9
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in
the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
Doors and Locks
emission control system malfunction and the Check
Engine Light is displayed. Door Locks
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
{CAUTION:
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
start system enabled. The system may be enabled or • Passengers, especially children, can easily
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under open the doors and fall out of a moving
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
page 3-73 for additional information. If your vehicle does will not open it. You increase the chance
not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
enable or disable the remote vehicle start system. crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
Remote Start Ready whenever you drive.
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start • Young children who get into unlocked
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
This feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the can be overcome by extreme heat and can
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature. suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature, the
whenever you leave it.
RKE transmitter will have an extended range that allows
locking or unlocking of the vehicle from approximately • Outsiders can easily enter through an
197 feet (60 m) away. unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the help prevent this from happening.
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
2-10
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button
on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
transmitter or the key in the driver’s door.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual You can program this feature using the Driver
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob. Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 3-73.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the Programmable Automatic
front doors.
Door Locks
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Delayed Locking Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-73 for more information on DIC
When locking the doors with the power lock switch programming.
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
2-11
Rear Door Security Locks When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. 1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock,
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote
The rear door security Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle
locks are located on the has one.
inside edge of each 2. Open the door from the outside.
rear door.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
Security Lock Label vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
shown is open.
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed
The rear doors must be open to access them.
when the driver’s door is open and the key is in
The label showing lock and unlock positions is located
the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
near the lock.
door will unlock.
To set the locks, do the following:
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and
so the slot is in the horizontal position. the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
2. Close the door. and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.
2-12
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION: • If you have air outlets on or under the

instrument panel, open them all the way.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass • If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable
or liftgate open because carbon monoxide the power liftgate function.
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-47.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power Liftgate
If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate on page 2-15.
open, or if electrical wiring or other cable To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or
connections must pass through the seal press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless
between the body and the liftglass or liftgate: Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless
• Make sure all other windows are shut. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Climate
Control System on page 3-23 or Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on
page 3-26.
2-13
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear
wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgate or
liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause
the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until
the wipers are moved off the liftglass.
Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage,
the liftglass and liftgate will not open. The liftglass and
liftgate will resume operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected and has adequate
voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function,
your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service.
On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the

underside of the license pocket applique (A) to open it.
The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the
liftglass release button on the RKE.
To open the entire liftgate, press the touchpad on the
underside of the liftgate handle (B). The vehicle must be
in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate,
use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
2-14
Power Liftgate
Power Liftgate Operation
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
{CAUTION: • If your vehicle has a power liftgate, disable
the power liftgate function.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate See Power Liftgate on page 2-15.
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and On vehicles with a power liftgate the button is located
on the center console.
even death.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the power
If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if
liftgate feature.
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the body &: Press the top of the button to open or close the
and the liftgate: power liftgate.
• Make sure all other windows are shut. OFF: Press the bottom of the button for manual
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling operation of the power liftgate.
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Climate
Control System in the index.
2-15
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in
power liftgate is moving. the following ways:
• Press and hold the power liftgate button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until
{CAUTION: the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
You or others could be injured if caught in the information.
path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is • Pressing the liftgate button on the center console.
no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening • Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside
and closing. liftgate handle.
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a second time
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking while the liftgate is moving reverses the direction.
for overhead obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate l: The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the
glass. Always check to make sure the area above power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. Press the button a second time during liftgate operation
to reverse that operation.
2-16
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under Obstacle Detection Features
extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions.
If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power
open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full
the power function is in progress, the liftgate power closed or open position. After removing the obstruction,
function will continue to completion. If you shift the the power liftgate operation can be used again. If the
transmission out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power
power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse cycle, the power function will deactivate, and you
to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. must manually open or close the liftgate. The REAR
Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver
latched before you drive away. Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support is open. After removing the obstructions, manually open
struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate
chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open temporarily, to the fully closed and latched position. The liftgate
then slowly close. See your dealer/retailer for service will now resume normal power operation.
before using the liftgate. Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the side
edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught between the
liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor,
the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully.
The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again
or closed manually. Do not force the liftgate open
or closed during a power cycle.
2-17
Manual Operation of Power Liftgate Power Running Boards
To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the Your vehicle may have power running boards.
switch on the center console to the OFF position.
The power running boards automatically extend from
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door
unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and has been opened. Once the door is closed, the running
closed. boards will automatically move back under the vehicle
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle after a brief delay. The vehicle must not be moving
on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open. for the running boards to extend or retract.
To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate
and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always The switch used to disable
close the liftgate before driving. the power running boards
is located on the center
If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate console below the climate
is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights control system.
will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move.
It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate
open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open,
the liftgate should be set to manual operation by
pressing the OFF switch on the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume operation when the battery The running boards cannot be disabled in the extended
is reconnected and charged. position.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the liftgate still
will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a
2-18
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-19
Power Windows The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children or Driver’s Side shown
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other The driver’s door also has switches that control the
controls or even make the vehicle move. The passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
windows will function with the keys in the when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY
ignition and they could be seriously injured or or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. page 2-27.
When there are children in the rear seat use the Press the switch to lower the window.
window lockout button to prevent unintentional Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
operation of the windows. window.
2-20
Express-Down Windows Sun Visors
Windows with an express-down feature allow the Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun
windows to be lowered without holding the switch. visor from the center mount and slide it along the
Press down fully on the window switch, then release, rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger
to activate the express-down mode. The express-down side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on to cover the side window. It can be moved along the
the front edge of the switch. rod from side-to-side in this position also.
Window Lockout Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
on both the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors.
is located with the power window switches on the
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to
driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear
turn the lamps on.
passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to
show the lockout feature is on.
2-21
Theft-Deterrent Systems To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
impossible to steal. security light will come on to inform the driver the
system is arming. If a door is open when the doors
are locked, the security light will flash.
Content Theft-Deterrent If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
system. process until the last door is closed and the delay
timer has expired. See Delayed Locking on
This is the security light. page 2-11.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door
is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then
will turn off to save the battery power.
2-22
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors Testing the Alarm
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the power door To test the alarm:
lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter. 1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
You should also remember that you can start your and open the driver’s door.
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been
set off. 2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: with the RKE transmitter.
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
system, the vehicle should be locked with the the security light to go out.
door key after the doors are closed.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter. door with the manual door lock and open the
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the door. This should set off the alarm.
alarm if it is armed.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the will not work.
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
turn it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will not
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-117.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
2-23
PASS-Key® III+ PASS-Key® III+ Operation
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
frequency subject to Federal Communications Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The system is automatically armed when the key
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
2. This device must accept any interference received, turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
including interference that may cause undesired from the LOCK/OFF position.
operation. You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. The security light will come on if there is a problem
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference. When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
2. This device must accept any interference received, is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
including interference that may cause undesired starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
operation of the device. the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to If the engine does not start and the security light on the
use this equipment. instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-24
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to To program the new additional key:
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, 1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-117. If the engine still 2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional The security light will turn off once the key has been
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are programmed.
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to be programmed.
have keys made and programmed to the system. If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-25
Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions
Vehicle Use the key to turn the
ignition switch to four
New Vehicle Break-In different positions.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with pedal must be applied.
new linings can mean premature wear and
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. The key
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
can only be removed when the ignition is turned
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing to LOCK/OFF.
a Trailer on page 4-49 for the trailer towing Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
capabilities of your vehicle and more ignition switch could cause damage or break the
information. key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
gradually increased.
2-26
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while Key In the Ignition
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service. Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
the engine is off. remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio in the Also, always remember to lock the doors.
ACC/ACCESSORY ignition position and the ON/RUN
position may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
ACC/ACCESSORY ignition position for a long period able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
of time. extended period of time.
C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the

position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
starts, and the key is released. The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with • Audio System
the engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle • Power Windows
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended • OnStar® System (if equipped)
period of time.
• Sunroof (if equipped)
D (START): This position starts the engine.
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver’s door is opened.
2-27
Starting the Engine the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start
and the key is held in START for many seconds,
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
Hybrid manual for more information. cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a
by turning the ignition switch to the
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
time, by returning the key to the START position
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
vehicle is stopped.
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
Starting Procedure to let the cranking motor cool down.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
and lubricate all moving parts. 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
and protects components. If the ignition key is
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
turned to the START position, and then released
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
when the engine begins cranking, the engine
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
will continue cranking for a few seconds or until
and lubricates all moving parts.
2-28
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the The switch used to adjust
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical the pedals is located on the
parts or accessories, you could change the way the instrument panel below the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, climate control system.
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal

On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since the Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals cannot move farther away from the standard pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top
position, but can move toward the driver for better of the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
pedal reach.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the to confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while using the cruise make only small adjustments.
control.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-6 for more information.
2-29
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold {CAUTION:
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C). injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
engine compartment, near the power steering fluid store the cord as it was before to keep it away
reservoir. from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
2-30
Active Fuel Management™ Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Management™. This system allows the engine to Hybrid manual for more information.
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending If your vehicle is has an automatic transmission,
on the driving conditions. it has an electronic shift position indicator within the
When less power is required, such as cruising at a instrument panel cluster. This display comes on when
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are There are several different
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, positions for the shift lever.
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
If your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 3-56 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-62 for more information
on using this display.
Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed
Automatic Transmission
2-31
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
Automatic Transmission running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
the best position to use when you start the engine when you are on fairly level ground, always set
because your vehicle cannot move easily. When parked your parking brake and move the shift lever
on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
load, you might notice an increase in the effort to shift on page 2-44. If you are pulling a trailer,
out of Park. See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) see Towing a Trailer on page 4-49.
under Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-44 for more
information.
2-32
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
{CAUTION: already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
If you have Four-Wheel Drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in {CAUTION:
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
Low — not in NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
PARK (P) on page 2-44. vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is with the engine running at high speed may damage
stopped. the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-33.
2-33
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission
If you need more power for passing, and you are: does not upshift and instead holds the current gear.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift,
however the transmission is operating normally.
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift controls.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift
accelerator all the way down. parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next transmissions computer. The transmission constantly
gear and has more power. makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a according to how the vehicle is being used, such as
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road with a heavy load or when temperature changes.
driving. You might want to shift the transmission to a During this adaptive shift control process, shifting might
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often. feel different as the transmission determines the best
settings.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding. See Skidding under Loss of When temperatures are very cold, the Allison
Control on page 4-11 Transmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission’s gear shifting could be delayed providing
Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that more stable shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts
adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving could be more noticeable with a cold transmission.
conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and This difference in shifting is normal.
downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to
determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is
able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such
as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load.
2-34
MANUAL MODE (M): This position, is available on FIRST (1): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed transmission
vehicles with the Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® this position reduces vehicle speed even more than
6-Speed transmission. It lets drivers select the range SECOND (2) without using the brakes. You can use it
of gears appropriate for current driving conditions. on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
If your vehicle has this feature, see Range Select Mode shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
(Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear
transmission) later in this section. until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving. For an Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
It reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D) without transmission, this position reduces vehicle speed
using the brakes. You might choose THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can use it for
instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding major/severe downgrades and off-road driving where
roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness
between gears and when going down a steep hill. of grade. When you shift to FIRST (1) it provides the
lowest gear appropriate to your current road speed and
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed continues to downshift as the vehicle slows, eventually
even more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. downshifting to FIRST (1) gear.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
control your speed as you go down steep mountain Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
off and on. pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
If you manually select SECOND (2) in an automatic do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
transmission, the transmission will start in second gear. use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
You can use this feature for reducing the speed of
the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
2-35
Range Selection Mode (Allison® or When MANUAL MODE (M) is selected a number
displays next to the M, indicating the current gear.
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Transmission)
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, your vehicle can automatically shift to lower
gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that
all gears below that number are available. When
FIFTH (5) is selected, FIRST (1) through FIFTH (5)
gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle, but
SIXTH (6) cannot be used until the plus/minus button
located on the steering column lever is used to change
to the gear.
Grade Braking is not available when the Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-37.
While using the Range Selection mode feature, cruise
control and the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
Your vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode.
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle’s
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
of gears.
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE (M).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the
steering column shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for your current driving conditions.
2-36
Low Traction Mode You can use this feature to assist when towing or
®
hauling a heavy load or if there is a need to charge a
If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission , or the battery installed in a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, it has a on page 4-49 for more information.
Low Traction Mode that assist in vehicle acceleration
when road conditions are slippery, such as with When Tow/Haul mode is
ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a stop, select the selected the Tow/Haul
second gear range using the Range Selection system. indicator light will come on.
This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects
wheel slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
Tow/Haul Mode
The Tow/Haul mode works with the Autoride® feature,
if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when
trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride® on
page 4-49.
Your vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector

button is located on the end of the column shift lever.
2-37
Four-Wheel Drive Automatic Transfer Case
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your The transfer case knob is
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra located to the left of the
traction. Read the part that follows before using instrument panel cluster.
four-wheel drive.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering Your vehicle has Four Wheel Drive with StabiliTrak®.
system. For information on StabiliTrak®, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-6.
Front Axle Locking Feature Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when You can choose among five driving settings:
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
lock or unlock is normal. you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take
your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash
while shifting. Fast flashing means the conditions
were not met to make the desired shift, typically the
vehicle was going too fast, the automatic transmission
2-38
was not in neutral. Slow flashing means the shift is in Drive Low if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep
progress. It will stay on when the shift is completed. mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending
If for some reason the transfer case cannot make steep hills. StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode.
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more
information.
2 m(Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used
for driving in most street and highway situations.
Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.
This setting also provides the best fuel economy. {CAUTION:
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
are variable. When driving your vehicle in AUTO, the cause your vehicle to roll even if the
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is primarily transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle’s software else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
determines a need for more traction, the system the parking brake before placing the transfer
will transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
page 2-43.
Two-Wheel Drive High.
4 m(Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel
high position when you need extra traction, such as on NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-45 or Towing
your vehicle. This is the best setting to use when Your Vehicle on page 4-45 for more information.
plowing snow. If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
4 n(Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting also you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message” under
You may never need this setting. It sends maximum DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
power to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel
2-39
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO position. your transmission in gear.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from
Four-Wheel Drive Low. The indicator light will flash while Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed. the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for the
Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can
before shifting the transmission into gear.
be done at any speed, except when shifting from
Four-Wheel Drive Low. The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and
bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from NEUTRAL
section for more information.
while the engine is running.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position
When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for
operation in 4L may damage or shorten the life of 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
the drivetrain. vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the transfer case will shift to Four-Wheel Drive High mode.
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred
method for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to
have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
2-40
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High switch position when
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel Drive your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, your vehicle Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Shifting into NEUTRAL
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive
High position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your not roll.
transmission into gear.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-43 for more
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has information.
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case. 3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
To help avoid damaging your vehicle, always
wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light 4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
to stop flashing before shifting the transmission 5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
into gear.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to NEUTRAL
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and till it stops and hold it for 10 seconds. Then slowly
bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low release the dial to the four low position. The
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from NEUTRAL NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case
while the engine is running. shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
2-41
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case 4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the transmission to vehicle.
REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the
transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
turn the engine off. avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for the
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P). Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission into gear.
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving
the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL different modes may cause the transfer case to enter
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following: the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer
case from possible damage and will only allow the
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds.
pedal. The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn three minutes.
the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer
case shift position (Two-Wheel Drive High,
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO).
After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the NEUTRAL light will go out.
2-42
Parking Brake If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
brake pedal with your left foot. overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at warning light is off before driving.
least 5 mph (8 km/h).
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-49.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever,
with the parking brake symbol and located above
the parking brake pedal.
2-43
Shifting Into PARK (P) 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-43 for more
{CAUTION: information.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with as far as it will go.
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can 3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
roll. If you have left the engine running, the in NEUTRAL (N).
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others 4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
not move, even when you are on fairly level leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
ground, use the steps that follow. With hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
four-wheel drive, if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-49.
2-44
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
Running parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
{CAUTION: lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move Torque Lock
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
So be sure the transfer case is in a drive To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
gear — not in NEUTRAL. then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P)
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine on page 2-44.
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
You or others could be injured. Do not leave of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then
you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-45
Shifting Out of PARK (P) If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to: 2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P).
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
fully released, and If you are still having a problem shifting, then have your
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of vehicle serviced soon.
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal Parking Over Things That Burn
is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) {CAUTION:
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-46 for more park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
information. things that can burn.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-46
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION: • Repairs were not done correctly.

• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas been modified improperly.
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness your vehicle:
and death. • Drive it only with all the windows down to
You might have exhaust coming in if: blow out any CO; and
• The exhaust system sounds strange or • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
2-47
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you {CAUTION:
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
{CAUTION: the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
Idling the engine with the climate control is running unless you have to. If you have left
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into the engine running, the vehicle can move
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under suddenly. You or others could be injured.
Engine Exhaust on page 2-47. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
PARK (P).
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-30.
2-48
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll,
with OnStar®, Compass and
even if the shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be Temperature Display
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
in NEUTRAL. Always set the parking brake.
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-44. of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on and the outside temperature.
page 4-49. Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the bottom
of the mirror. See OnStar® System on page 2-60 for
more information about the services OnStar® provides.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-49
Temperature and Compass Display Compass Calibration
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to The compass may need calibration if one of the
turn the compass/temperature display on or off. following occurs:
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be • After approximately five seconds, the display does
calibrated. For more information, see “Compass not show a compass heading, N for North, for
Calibration” following. example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius: be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears. • The compass does not display the correct heading
2. Press the button again to change the display to the and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
desired unit of measurement. After approximately In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in and the compass/temperature display will return. the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an until CAL is displayed.
extended period of time, see your dealer/retailer. The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating the in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
temperature is normal. reads a direction.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Compass Variance
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time the
ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
dimming feature off or back on, press the on/off button. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
The indicator light on the mirror is lit when the compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
automatic dimming feature is on. outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will
be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
2-50
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s 3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not zone number appears in the display. Release the
adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass button. After approximately four seconds of
could give false readings. inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the compass/temperature display will return.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone Cleaning the Mirror
number on the following zone map.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a

zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
2-51
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
with Compass and Temperature O: Press this button to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light to the left of
Display the button will turn on to indicate when the feature is on.
Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it
Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on, an
is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
Compass Operation
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and Press the compass/temperature button once briefly to
the outside temperature. turn the display on or off.
Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the display Compass Calibration
on or off.
The compass may need calibration if one of the
Temperature Display following occurs:
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the • If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
compass/temperature button. Pressing the compass/ • After approximately five seconds, the display does
temperature button once briefly, will toggle the display not show a compass heading, N for North, for
reading on and off. To alternate the temperature reading example, there may be a strong magnetic field
between Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold the interfering with the compass. Such interference may
compass/temperature button for approximately be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
three seconds until the display blinks F and C. After note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
approximately five seconds of inactivity, the display will
stop blinking and display the last selection made. • The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, see your
dealer/retailer.
2-52
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the To adjust for compass variance:
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push 1. Find your current location and variance zone
in the compass/temperature button for approximately number on the following zone map.
nine seconds or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as
during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, your compass could
give false readings.
2. Press and hold the compass/temperature button

for six seconds until a zone number appears in
the display.
3. Press the compass/temperature button on the
bottom of the mirror until the new zone number
appears in the display. After you stop pressing the
button, the display will show a compass direction
within a few seconds.
2-53
Cleaning the Mirror Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirrors

Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects
behind you. The mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow areas.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror If your vehicle has trailer towing type mirrors, they can
performance. be adjusted so you can have a clear view of the
objects behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to
extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer.
These mirrors can be manually folded forward or
rearward. The lower portion of the mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more
from the driver’s seat. The convex mirror can be
adjusted manually to the driver’s preferred position for
better vision.
2-54
Your vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which To adjust each mirror, press one of the four arrows
help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice. located on the control pad to move the mirror in
When the rear window defogger button is pressed, the the direction you want it to go. Adjust each outside
heated mirrors are also turned on. Only the upper mirror so that you can see a little of your vehicle, and
glass of the mirror is heated. The lower convex part of the area behind your vehicle.
the mirror is not heated. The mirrors may also include a memory function that
Your mirror may also have a turn signal arrow that will works with the memory seats. See Memory Seat,
flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-6 for more information.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
Outside Power Mirrors damage when going through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
If your vehicle is equipped mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
with outside power to return both mirrors to their original unfolded position
mirrors, the controls are before driving.
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror or (B) to

select the passenger’s side mirror. Press either
(A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
2-55
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
If your vehicle is equipped and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
with outside power happens, you will need to reset the mirrors.
foldaway mirrors, the See “Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
controls are located on the
driver’s door armrest. Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
• Press (A) to select the driver side mirror. Then press To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
the arrows located on the four-way control pad to them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset
adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect this them to their normal position.
mirror.
Turn Signal Indicator
• Press (B) to select the passenger side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction
deselect this mirror. of the turn or lane change.
• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving Ground Illumination Lamps
position. The mirrors may also include ground illumination lamps
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. in the base of the mirror. These lamps help you see the
area near the base of the front doors when it is dark out.
2-56
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror Outside Convex Mirror
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver’s outside mirror
will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This {CAUTION:
feature is controlled by the on and off settings found
on the electrochromic inside mirror. See Automatic
Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass and A convex mirror can make things (like other
Temperature Display on page 2-49 or Automatic vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
Temperature Display on page 2-52 for more information. could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
Park Tilt Mirrors before changing lanes.
If your vehicle has the memory package, the outside

mirrors are able to perform the park tilt function. The passenger side mirror may have convex glass.
This feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can
the curb when parallel parking. This feature will cause be seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things like
the passenger side mirror and/or driver side mirror other vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). Outside Heated Mirrors
The passenger side mirror and/or the driver side mirror
will return to its original position when the vehicle is The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which
shifted out of REVERSE (R) or the ignition is turned to off. help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice.
This feature can be turned on or off through the When the rear window defogger button is pressed, the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle heated mirrors are also turned on. See “Rear Window
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73 for more Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System
information. on page 3-26 or Climate Control System on page 3-23
2-57
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
If you do not use proper care before and while
(URPA) backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist could occur. Even with URPA, always check
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid other behind your vehicle before backing up. While
vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speeds backing, be sure to look for objects and check
less than 5 mph (8 km/h). It can determine how close your vehicle’s mirrors.
objects are to the rear bumper, up to 8 feet (2.5 m)
behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are located
on the rear bumper. On some vehicles this
display is located near
the passenger side
{CAUTION: rear window and can be
seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
If your vehicle has the display, there are three
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. color-coded lights to provide distance and system
information.
If your vehicle does not have the display and it has
URPA, you will hear the beeps as described in
the following information.
2-58
How the System Works The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will Description English Metric
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system is
working. amber light 8 ft 2.5 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m
(8 km/h). If you are above this speed, the red light on amber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m
the rear display will flash.
amber/amber/red lights
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches flashing and beep for 1 ft 0.3 m
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. three seconds
Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from your
rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather. The system can be
disabled by pressing the
A single beep will sound the first time an object is rear park aid disable button
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m) located next to the radio.
away. Beeping will occur for three seconds when The indicator light will
you are closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object. come on to indicate that
URPA is off.
2-59
When the System Does Not Seem to OnStar® System
Work Properly
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep your
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-110.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
or an object was hanging out of your liftgate/liftglass advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
during your last drive cycle, the red light may security, information, and convenience services. If your
illuminate in the rear display. Once the attached airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
object is removed, URPA will return to normal automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
operation. request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle. 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system. the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck. OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-60
A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or (If equipped)
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to
speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, • Link to Emergency Services
7 days a week. • Roadside Assistance
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles. • Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of • AccidentAssist
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar Services • GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan, • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for minutes
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
2-61
Available Services included with OnStar Virtual Advisor
Directions & Connections Plan OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
• RideAssist through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
• Information and Convenience Services continental U.S.).
OnStar Hands-Free Calling OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-124 for
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid more information.
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). information.
2-62
How OnStar Service Works Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of available.
recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press, (including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
additional information regarding the accident that your Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your Your Responsibility
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services. Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a this means that your system is not functioning properly
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
service provider for service in that area. OnStar light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place subscription has expired. You can always press the
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception is active.
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
2-63
Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote System
System Operation (With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
including interference that may cause undesired System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
operation. (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. buttons, follow the instructions below.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: This system provides a way to replace up to three
1. This device may not cause interference. remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
and home automation devices.
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
This includes any garage door opener model
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
use this equipment.
2-64
Read the instructions completely before attempting to Programming Universal Home
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person available to Remote — Rolling Code
assist you in programming the transmitter. If you have questions or need help programming the
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future or go to www.learcar2u.com.
programming. You only need the original remote control Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also Code units.
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of
the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be Programming a garage door opener involves
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section. before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park procedure.
outside of the garage. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or security device To program up to three devices:
you are programming.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside

buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-65
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above the
selected button, should slowly blink. You may
need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the what you used for the garage door opener.
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head If these instructions do not work, you probably have
unit and may be a colored button. Press this a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
button. After you press this button, you will have Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
30 seconds to complete the following steps. garage door opener.
2-66
Programming Universal Home To program up to three devices:
Remote — Fixed Code
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
go to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door

opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row
of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Your hand held transmitter may have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-67
Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
may also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program your Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
you do not have the original hand held transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as
they do in the examples, but they should be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter
may be labeled as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be labeled as
“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
• A switch in the middle position may be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-68
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from
left to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes you
enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings that
you wrote down in Step 2, in order from left
to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
buttons at the same time for about three seconds. Universal Home Remote. You will have
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.
Remote into programming mode. Now press one button on the Universal Home
Remote for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button
in the vehicle.
2-69
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, Reprogramming Universal Home
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on. Remote Buttons
6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating
control the garage door until the garage door the instructions.
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the Erasing Universal Home Remote
button from five to 55 seconds.
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly You should erase the programmed buttons when you
until programming is complete. sell or terminate your lease.
8. Press and release the same button again. To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
The garage door should move, confirming Universal Home Remote device:
that programming is successful and complete. 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
To program another Fixed Code device such as an time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
additional garage door opener, a security device, indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing begin to blink rapidly.
a different button in Step 6 than what you used for 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
the garage door opener. buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
Using Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5.
half of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
2-70
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the
front and rear of the floor console or in the fold down
armrest. The front cupholders can be adjusted by
moving the insert forward or rearward. You may also
have cupholders in the second and third row seat
armrest areas.
To access the cupholders in the rear floor console,
pull downward on the lid.
Center Console Storage

Your vehicle may have a console compartment with
cupholders between the bucket seats.
To open it, press the button and lift the console lid open.
The rear of the console has a cupholder that swings
down for the rear seat passenger to use.
2-71
Luggage Carrier Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
used to load things on top of the vehicle. and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof. to the siderail supports.
It may also have crossrails which can be moved • Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
siderails or siderail supports.
To move a crossrail, lift the release lever, on both
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that sides of the rail, up to loosen it. Slide the crossrail to
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the desired position balancing the force side to side.
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your Press the release lever on both sides of the rail,
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats down to tighten it. Try to slide the crossrail back and
as far forward as possible and against the side rails, forth slightly to be sure it is tight.
making sure to fasten it securely. • If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
page 4-35. tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are • After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
driving, check to make sure the luggage and cargo are into the siderail.
still securely fastened.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
2-72
Rear Storage Area If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s To use the cover, do the following:
side trim panel. 1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle.
To open the utility compartment, turn the knobs and 2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets
swing the compartment door open. The compartment on the cargo area trim panels.
door can be removed. To return the cover to the retracted position, do the
following:
Rear Seat Armrest 1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat armrest. posts from the retaining sockets.
Pull the loop at the top of the armrest down to access 2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
the cupholders. position.
To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbase model,
Cargo Cover do the following:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
{CAUTION: 2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover end cap,
push the cover end cap toward the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or 3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the
sudden maneuver. You or others could be vehicle.
injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
2-73
To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following: Sunroof
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down. Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the to be turned to ON, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
cover end cap into the slot in the passenger’s must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work
side trim panel. for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until a
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it front door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power
next to the driver’s side trim panel slot. (RAP) on page 2-27 for more information.
4. Press the end caps in, this will allow the cover to There are two switches in
fit into the trim slot. the overhead console that
5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure it is operate the sunroof.
secure.
On the extended wheelbase models there are
two cover positions. The slots furthest forward allow
the cover to be used if the third seat is removed
or folded down. The cover can be installed
and removed from either side.
Cargo Tie Downs

Your vehicle may have cargo tie downs in the rear Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
from moving inside the vehicle. the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
2-74
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open feature.
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From From the closed position, press the rear of the
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
the full-open position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of
the passenger’s side switch. To stop the sunroof
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will partway, release the switch.
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed. Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver’s the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then open
side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To close
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the “Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will close previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the is an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing,
switch a second time. The sunshade will open the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the
automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has re-opened,
manually. refer to the “Manual-Close” or “Express-Close” functions
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the described previously.
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the
comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side
switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full-open
position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
2-75
✍ NOTES
2-76
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Exit Lighting .................................................3-20
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Reading Lamps ............................................3-20
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Electric Power Management ...........................3-21
Horn .............................................................3-6 Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-21
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-22
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-23
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8 Climate Controls ............................................3-23
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9 Climate Control System .................................3-23
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-26
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-33
Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................3-10 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-33
Windshield Washer .......................................3-11 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-12 and Electronic Climate Controls ...................3-35
Cruise Control ..............................................3-12
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-16 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-37
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-17 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-38
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-17 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-39
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-18 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-39
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-18 Tachometer .................................................3-39
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .........................3-19 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-39
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-40
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-20 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-41
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-20 Charging System Light ..................................3-43
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-20 Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-44
3-1
Section 3 Instrument Panel
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-45 DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-65
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-46 DIC Vehicle Customization
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..............................3-46 (With DIC Buttons) ....................................3-73
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-47 Audio System(s) .............................................3-82
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-47 Setting the Clock ..........................................3-83
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-48 Radio(s) (MP3) .............................................3-85
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-51 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-52 Six-Disc CD Player) .................................3-102
Security Light ...............................................3-52 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-53 DVD Player) ...........................................3-106
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-53 XM Radio Messages ...................................3-111
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-53 Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-112
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-53 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System .........3-113
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-54 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-122
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-55 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-124
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-55 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-124
DIC Operation and Displays Radio Reception .........................................3-125
(With DIC Buttons) ....................................3-56 Rear Side Window Antenna ..........................3-126
DIC Operation and Displays XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-126
(Without DIC Buttons) ................................3-62
3-2
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
United States version shown; Canada similar
3-4
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-33. M. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn N. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. O. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Wheel Controls on page 3-124.
Cluster on page 3-38. P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard page 3-23 or Dual Automatic Climate Controls
Warning Flashers on page 3-6. (If Equipped). See Dual Automatic Climate Control
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation System on page 3-26.
on page 2-31. Q. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
F. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). Outlet(s) on page 3-22. Cigarette Lighter
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-37. (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
on page 3-23.
G. Driver Information Center Controls. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-55. R. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-6. Pedal Adjust Button
H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-82. (If Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
I. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on Pedal on page 2-29. Rear Park Assist Disable Button
page 3-16. (If Equipped). See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
J. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp (URPA) on page 2-58. Heated Windshield Washer
Override on page 3-20. Instrument Panel Brightness Fluid Button (If Equipped). See Windshield Washer
Control. See Instrument Panel Brightness on on page 3-11. Power Running Boards Disable Button
page 3-19. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). (If Equipped). See Power Running Boards on
See Fog Lamps on page 3-18. page 2-18.
K. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped). S. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-71.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-38.
L. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on
page 3-12.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
police know you have a problem. the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering Horn
column. To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal Your vehicle has a tilt wheel, that lets you adjust the
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to steering wheel before driving. Raising it to the highest
turn the flashers off. level gives more room to exit and enter your vehicle.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left includes the following:
side of the column. G(Turn and Lane Change Signals): See Turn and
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 53(Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer):
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
N(Windshield Wipers): See Windshield Wipers

on page 3-9.
3-7
L(Windshield Washer): See Windshield Washer on An arrow on the instrument
page 3-11. panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
5 (Rear Wiper Delay):See Rear Window turn or lane change.
Wiper/Washer on page 3-12.
Z (Rear Wiper): See Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 3-12.
=(Rear Wiper Wash): See Rear Window As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
Wiper/Washer on page 3-12. flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
Turn and Lane-Change Signals turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
to signal a turn or a lane change.
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-117.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return Turn Signal On Chime
automatically.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever for (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
less than one second until the arrow starts to flash. turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
This will cause the turn signals to automatically flash also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC).
three times. It will flash six times if tow-haul mode To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal
is active. Holding the turn signal lever for more than lever to the off position.
one second will cause the turn signals to flash until you
release the lever. The lever will return by itself when
it is released.
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): They will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push you. The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward normal operation.
you. Then release it.
Windshield Wipers
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
the instrument panel them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
cluster will also be on. loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-61.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
Flash-to-Pass A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
3-9
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the Rainsense™ II Wipers
windshield wipers.
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield wipers,
8(Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping the moisture sensor is located next to the inside
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield. When
The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist active, these sensors are able to detect moisture on
longer, for more wipe cycles. the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off. To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as of the rainsensor.
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
be very useful in light rain or snow. it is recommended that the mid-range setting (position 3)
be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
the first solid band past the delay settings, for steady closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
wiping at low speed.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency of
? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to the the wipes from the off setting to the high speed setting
second solid band past the delay settings, for according to the weather conditions. The wipers can be
high-speed wiping. left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the
AUTO position and the wipers are active.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-10
Windshield Washer Heated Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
{CAUTION: or bugs from your windshield.
The button is located in
In freezing weather, do not use your washer the switchbank under the
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the climate controls.
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with

the windshield washer symbol at the top of the Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the
multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the heated windshield washer fluid system. The indicator
windshield. The wipers clear the window and then light will flash. This activation initiates four heated
either stop or return to the preset speed. wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer nozzles
for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
3-11
Rear Window Wiper/Washer =(Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiper
wash, push the button on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the
{CAUTION: rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and
either stop or return to your preset speed. For more
washer cycles, press and hold the button.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper
blocking your vision. will return to the parked position and stop.
The rear wiper control is located on the turn Cruise Control

signal/multifunction lever.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper
position. {CAUTION:
9 (Off): To turn the wiper off, slide the lever to this
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
setting.
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): To turn on the rear wiper not use your cruise control on winding roads
delay, slide the lever to this setting. or in heavy traffic.
Z (Rear Wiper): To turn on the rear wiper, slide the CAUTION: (Continued)
lever to this setting.
3-12
The cruise control buttons
CAUTION: (Continued) are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery

roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below T(On/Off): This button can both activate and turn off
about 25 mph (40 km/h). the system. The indicator light on the button turns on
When you apply your brakes, cruise control is turned off. when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. When road conditions set speed.
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
cruise control back on. SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
or make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control

without erasing the set speed from memory.
3-13
Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set, Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
will come on after the cruise control has been set to Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
the desired speed. more, press the +RES button on your steering wheel.
The vehicle will go back to the previous set speed
and stay there.
{CAUTION: Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
and go into cruise when you do not want to. • Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
You could be startled and even lose control. wheel until you reach your new desired speed,
Keep the cruise control switch off until you then release it.
want to use cruise control. • To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-14
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Using Cruise Control on Hills
Control How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
To reduce your speed while using cruise control: upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift
then release it. to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Ending Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using There are three ways to end cruise control:
Cruise Control • Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. • Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the previous set cruise speed. • Press the On/Off button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-15
Exterior Lamps AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
The exterior lamps brightness, together with the following:
control is located on the • Parking Lamps
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. • Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position to

It controls the following systems: turn on the parking lamps together with the following:
• Headlamps • Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps • Taillamps
• Parking Lamps • License Plate Lamps
2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
• Instrument Panel Lights turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps
The exterior lamps control has four positions: listed below.
O(Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off the • Parking Lamps
automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). • Instrument Panel Lights
Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will
turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. • Taillamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only
work for vehicles that are shifted into the PARK (P)
position.
3-16
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is The DRL system will come on when the following
on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes conditions are met:
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are • The ignition is on.
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to • The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
prevent the battery from being drained. • The transmission is not in PARK (P).
Headlamps on Reminder • The light sensor determines it is daytime.
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not
is off and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
the light off. When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for control to the OFF position and then release.
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, must be in the PARK (P) position, before the DRL lamps
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods can be turned off.
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
3-17
Automatic Headlamp System If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
system will turn on the headlamps at the normal one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
brightness, along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
lights will also be dim. as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release Brightness on page 3-19.
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
must be in the PARK (P) position, before the automatic off, turn the control to the off position.
headlamp system can be turned off.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
when the automatic headlamps turn on. Be sure it is not Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73.
covered, or the headlamps will come on whenever
the ignition is on. The regular headlamp system can be turned on
when needed.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast Fog Lamps
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime -(Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps, the
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running control is located next to the exterior lamps control on the
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and fog lamps to come on.
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting Press the button to turn the fog lamps on or off. A light
longer than the delay. will come on in the instrument panel cluster.
3-18
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps,
automatically turn on. so the total current draw of the attached lamps
should be less than this value. The attachment points
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located
fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
above the overhead console, a dark green switched
go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
power wire and a black ground wire.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
For further information on roof mount emergency lamp
to be on along with the fog lamps.
installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer.
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may have the
If your vehicle has this feature, this button includes snow plow prep package. For further information see
wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-41.
center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
Instrument Panel Brightness
This button is located on
the overhead console. D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and is located next to the exterior lamp control.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof knob to the farthest clockwise position turns on the
mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will dome lamps.
activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the
bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button
will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator.
3-19
Dome Lamps Exit Lighting
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. The interior lamps come on when the key is removed
They turn off after all the doors are closed. from the ignition. They turn off automatically in
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the 20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome
instrument panel brightness knob, located next to override button is pressed in.
the exterior lamps control, clockwise to the farthest
position. In this position, the dome lamps remain Reading Lamps
on whether a door is opened or closed.
If your vehicle has reading lamps they are located on
the overhead console.
Dome Lamp Override
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located
The dome lamp override button is located next to the next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button
exterior lamps control. again.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
button again to return it to the extended position so that located next to the lamp.
the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the extended
position. If the dome override button is pressed in,
the lamps will not come on.
3-20
Electric Power Management EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
performance and extended life of the battery. some accessories.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver message might be displayed, such as Battery Saver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move Active or Service Battery Charging System. If this
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an message is displayed, it is recommended that the
alert will be displayed. driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not be Battery Run-Down Protection
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that
is needed for very high electrical loads. This feature shuts off the dome, and reading lamps if they
are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is
A high electrical load occurs when several of the off. This will keep the battery from running down.
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
3-21
Accessory Power Outlet(s) Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the
accessory power outlet and could result in blown
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect adapter or vehicle fuses. If you experience a problem,
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
telephone or CB radio. the accessory power plugs.
There are two under the climate controls, one inside the Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
center floor console, one on the rear of the center vehicle may damage it or keep other components
floor console and one accessory power outlet in the rear from working as they should. The repairs would not
cargo area on the passenger side. be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the protective exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
cap. When not in use, always cover the accessory Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
power outlet with the protective cap. electrical equipment.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even with When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
the ignition off. Continuing to use accessory power proper installation instructions included with the
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause equipment. Do not use equipment exceeding the
the vehicle’s battery to run down. maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
power outlet, the battery may drain causing your damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
This would not be covered by the warranty. from the plug because the power outlets are
Always unplug all electrical devices when designed for accessory power plugs only.
turning off your vehicle.
3-22
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped. Climate Control System
Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable your vehicle can be controlled with this system.
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
Manual Operation
the ashtray. Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up. direct the airflow inside of the vehicle.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and To change the current mode, select one of the following:
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it panel outlets.
is heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from )(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating the instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. depending upon where the knob is placed between
the settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-23
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle.
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent
windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor odors from entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also
outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically select help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly once
outside air. Recirculation cannot be selected when in the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the
Floor Mode. outside temperature.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
Defrosting” later in this section. recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator will
flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning
By positioning the right knob between two modes, a compressor will also come on when this mode is
combination of those two modes is selected. activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may
The air conditioning compressor will be on unless the fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
outside temperature is close to freezing. fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed. Recirculation mode can be turned off
9(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or by pressing the button again, or turning off the engine.
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the AUX (Auxiliary): Pressing this button will turn the
front system off. rear heating and air conditioning on. See Rear
Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 3-33 or
?(Recirculation): Press this button to turn the Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and
recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, an Electronic Climate Controls on page 3-35 for more
indicator light will come on. information.
3-24
Temperature Control: Rotate the thumbwheels up or Defogging and Defrosting
down to increase or decrease the temperature on
the driver’s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
the dual zone system, if equipped. Otherwise, turn humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise to glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield. Turn the right knob
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button on the left clockwise to select the defog or defrost mode.
knob to turn the air conditioning system on or off. - (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
When A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on to windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers.
show that the air conditioning has been activated. This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets,
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air and side window vents. When this mode is selected,
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time the system turns off recirculation and runs the air
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
the system to operate more efficiently. is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. 0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog
This is normal. or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode
directs a portion of the air to the windshield and side
window vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode,
the system will automatically force outside air into the
vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-25
Rear Window Defogger Dual Automatic Climate Control
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to System
remove fog from the rear window.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle can
<(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button on the be controlled with this system. Your vehicle also has
right knob to turn on the rear window defogger. a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
The system will automatically turn off several minutes section.
after it has been activated. The defogger can also If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning Hybrid manual for more information.
off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
Different climate control settings can be selected for the
driver and passengers.
3-26
Driver’s Side Temperature Control Passenger’s Side Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature buttons are used to adjust The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used to
the temperature of the air coming through the system change the temperature of the air coming through
on the driver’s side. The temperature can be adjusted the system on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
even if the system is turned off. This is possible since The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is
outside air will always flow through the system as turned off. This is possible since outside air will
the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to always flow through the system as the vehicle is
recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
section. See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
the cabin temperature. The driver side temperature cabin temperature. The passenger side display will show
display will show the temperature setting decreasing the temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
or increasing.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the
PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator.
When the passenger’s temperature setting is set
different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the
PASS button will illuminate and both the driver’s
side and passenger’s side temperature displays will
be shown.
3-27
Automatic Operation 2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
active the system will control the inside temperature, for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or
the air delivery, and the fan speed. passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the
Use the steps below to place the entire system in temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
automatic mode: temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
1. Press the AUTO button.
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
be lit on the display. The current delivery mode and the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
fan speed will also be displayed for approximately
5 seconds. Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and
operation and air inlet will be automatically also turns on the headlamps. For more information on
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will
outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
quickly cool down the vehicle. The light on the temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
button will illuminate in recirculation. delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
3-28
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the climate manual control. The fan setting will remain displayed
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and and the AUTO light will turn off. The air delivery
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be mode will remain under automatic control.
changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation yN z(Mode): Press the mode up and down buttons
can be selected once vent or bi-level mode has to manually change the direction of the airflow in the
been selected. The temperature can also be adjusted vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired
using either temperature button. If the air delivery mode mode appears on the display. Pressing one of these
or temperature settings are adjusted with the system buttons when the system is off will change air delivery
off, the display will illuminate briefly to show you mode without turning the system on. Pressing one
the settings and then return off. Press the on/off button of these buttons when in automatic control will place the
or the up down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost mode under manual control.
button, AUTO button, or the air conditioning button
to turn the system on when it is off. The air delivery mode setting will be displayed and the
AUTO light will turn off. The fan will remain under
Manual Operation automatic control.
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or H(Vent): This setting will deliver air to the instrument
fan speed. panel outlets.
y9z(Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols allow )(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up instrument panel outlets and half to the floor outlets.
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets
to decrease fan speed. depending upon where the knob is placed between
Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off the settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield
will turn the system on. Pressing one of these buttons and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
when in automatic control will place the fan under upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-29
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the Air Conditioning
floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the
windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor #(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air
outlets. In this mode, the system automatically conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. When air
selects outside air. conditioning is selected, an indicator light comes on to
show that the air conditioning has been activated.
-(Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section. Pressing this button when the outside temperature is
too cool for air conditioning will make the air conditioning
@(Recirculation): Press this button to turn the indicator flash three times and then turn off to show
recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, an that the air conditioning mode is not available. If the air
indicator light comes on. conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. below a temperature which is too cool for air
It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light will
odors from entering the vehicle. Recirculation may also turn off to show that the air conditioning mode has
help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly once been canceled.
the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
outside temperature. inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it
takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
system to operate more efficiently.
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator will The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning air, so a small amount of water might drip underneath
compressor will also come on when this mode is the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may This is normal.
fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed. Recirculation mode can be turned off
by pressing the button again, or turning off the engine.
3-30
Sensors The interior temperature
sensors located in the
headliner above the driver
side seat and if equipped,
in the headliner above
the second row seats
measure the temperature
of the air inside the vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located

behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside
air temperature and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar The climate control system uses the information from
radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
will not work properly. adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the
air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
3-31
Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window remove fog from the rear window.
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear <(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
fog or frost from your windshield. turn on the rear window defogger. It will automatically
turn off several minutes after it has been activated.
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
or defrost modes. the button again or by turning off the engine. Do not
-(Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,
This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
and side window vents. When this mode is selected, the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
system turns off recirculation and runs the air is pressed.
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
vehicle until all the windows are clear. anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
0(Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or frost Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs
a portion of the air to the windshield and side window
vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the
system will automatically force outside air into the
vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-32
Outlet Adjustment Rear Air Conditioning and
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side Heating System
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls are
Operation Tips three knobs located in the headliner. The system can
be controlled from the front controls as well as the
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow, rear controls.
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. front climate control system, an indicator will be lit.
Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, press the system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the airflow
fan up button to the maximum fan level before in the rear will be approximately the same direction,
driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow temperature, and fan speed as the front. Pressing the
and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging AUX button again will turn the rear system and the
the inside of your window. indicator off.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of If the rear controls are adjusted, the system will enter a
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear will then
your vehicle. be directed according to the settings of rear controls.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your The rear system can be turned off by pressing the
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the AUX button on the front climate control system and the
performance of the heating and air conditioning indicator will turn off.
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-33
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
H (Vent): This setting directs the air through the

headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets

as well as the headliner outlets. The rear system
floor outlets are located directly behind the second row
seats. The flow can be divided between vent and
floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed
Fan Knob between the settings.
Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to 6 (Floor): This setting directs most of the air through
increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the floor outlets. The rear system floor outlets are
the way counterclockwise to turn the rear system off. located directly behind the second row seats.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward
the blue area for cooler air.
3-34
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating If the rear controls are adjusted, the system enters a
rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear will then be
System and Electronic Climate directed according to the settings of rear controls.
The rear system can be turned off by pressing the
Controls AUX button on the front climate control system and the
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning indicator will turn off.
controls, they are integrated with the rear seat audio If the indicator in the front AUX button is off, the rear
controls located in the center console. The system can system is off.
be controlled from the front controls as well as the
rear controls. To turn the system on from the rear, press any rear
climate control button, except the C button. To turn the
To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the
front climate control system, an indicator will be lit. system off, press and hold the C button.
Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear
system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the airflow
in the rear will be approximately the same direction,
temperature, and fan speed as the front. Pressing the
AUX button again turns the rear system and the
indicator off.
3-35
Manual Operation
D C (Fan): Use the fan buttons on the rear seat
audio control panel to manually adjust the fan speed.
To increase or decrease the airflow, press the
D orC button. Pressing the fan up button when the
system is off will turn the system on. The air delivery
mode will remain under automatic control. To turn the
rear system off, keep pressing the C button.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These buttons
select the temperature of the air flowing into the
passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and
press the − button for cooler air.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls N(Mode): Press the mode button to manually change
the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly
Automatic Operation, If Equipped. press the button until the desired mode appears on the
display. Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery
AUTO: Press the mode button until this setting is selections.
selected to control the inside temperature, the air
delivery, and the fan speed. AUTO will illuminate in the
display when automatic operation is active.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press the + or
− buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature.
The rear control temperature display will show the
temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
The display only indicates climate control functions
when the system is in rear independent mode.
3-36
Warning Lights, Gages, and Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
Indicators and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even
the warning lights and gages could also save you or dangerous. So please get to know your vehicle’s
others from injury. warning lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the that works along with warning lights and gages.
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you more information.
know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
3-37
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown. Canada similar.

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information.
3-38
Speedometer and Odometer Safety Belt Reminders
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both Safety Belt Reminder Light
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
or kilometers (used in Canada). belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will

Trip Odometer also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has then it will flash for
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to several more.
zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer. This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
Holding the reset button for approximately one second unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it. is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off, come on.
press the reset button.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
3-39
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
will sound for several seconds to remind the front panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
Sensing System on page 1-86 for more information. problem. The system check includes the airbag
The passenger safety belt light, located on the sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
several seconds and then flash for several more. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-76.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger This light will come on
remains unbuckled and when you start your
the vehicle is in motion. vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the

chime nor the light will come on. If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-40
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION: Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your overhead console has a passenger airbag status
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you indicator.
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
United States Canada
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a and off, for several seconds as a system check.
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on. will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
more information. frontal airbag.
3-41
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). {CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
{CAUTION: designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
If the on indicator comes on when you have a child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
front passenger’s seat, it means that the under some unusual circumstance, even
passenger sensing system has not turned off though it is turned off. We recommend that
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
rear-facing child restraint would be very close status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
child restraint in the right front passenger’s airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-86
seat if the airbag is turned on. for more on this, including important safety information.
3-42
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights Charging System Light
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing This light will come on
system. See your dealer/retailer for service. briefly when you turn on
the ignition, but the
engine is not running,
{CAUTION: as a check to show you
it is working.
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
vehicle serviced promptly, because an problem with the charging system. A charging system
adult-size person sitting in the right front Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
for more information. This light could indicate that you
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
on page 3-40 for more on this, including electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
important safety information. If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-43
Voltmeter Gage Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
When your engine is not the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
running, but the ignition is extended period. This condition is normal since the
on, this gage shows charging system is not able to provide full power
the battery’s state of at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
charge in DC volts. condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create full power.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
this light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65
and Charging System Light on page 3-43 for more
information.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The charging system
regulates voltage based on the state of the battery
for improved fuel economy and battery life. The gage
may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to
higher reading, this is normal. Readings between the
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range. The gage may also read low during the
fuel economy mode, this is normal.
3-44
Brake System Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
come on when you set the parking brake. If you try to
drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound
when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). {CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can Your brake system may not be working properly
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
you need both parts working well.
with the brake system warning light on can lead
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there to an accident. If the light is still on after you
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
inspected right away. have the vehicle towed for service.
This light may also come on due to low brake fluid.
See Brakes on page 5-42 for more information.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may take
longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on
page 4-45.
3-45
Antilock Brake System StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Warning Light If equipped, this warning
light should come on
For vehicles with the briefly when the engine
Antilock Brake System is started.
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed

so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. may be a problem with your StabiliTrak® system
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light and your vehicle may need service. When this warning
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak® system is
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your active.
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on and
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system stays on for an extended period of time when the system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes is turned on, your vehicle needs service. See
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for all
brake related DIC messages.
3-46
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.

This light will also come on when one or more of your
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. tires are significantly underinflated.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for more
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to information.
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity. See Tires on page 5-63 for more information.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-31. If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode System, this light will flash for approximately
Hybrid manual for more information. 60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
3-47
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
Check Engine Light might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of that might not be covered by your warranty.
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
environment.
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
The check engine light Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
comes on to indicate controls and can cause this light to come on.
that there is an OBD II Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
problem and service repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
is required. also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before

any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-48
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working, If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
This light also comes on during a malfunction in stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
one of two ways: Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
and could damage the emission control system on follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be for service as soon as possible.
required.
If the Light Is On Steady
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. You might be able to correct the emission system
Diagnosis and service might be required. malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If the Light is Flashing
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The following can prevent more serious damage to install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-9.
your vehicle: The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
• Reduce vehicle speed. been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
• Avoid hard accelerations. fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
• Avoid steep uphill grades. turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
3-49
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? Emissions Inspection and
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. Maintenance Programs
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the Some state/provincial and local governments have or
light off. might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
Have you recently changed brands of fuel? inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. registration.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality Here are some things you need to know to help your
causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. vehicle pass an inspection:
You might notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on engine light is on or not working properly.
acceleration — these conditions might go away once Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
the engine is warmed up. This will be detected by (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
the system and cause the light to turn on. emission control systems have not been completely
If you experience one or more of these conditions, diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. if you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your driving. This can take several days of routine driving.
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
problems that might have developed. dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-50
Oil Pressure Gage A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine may damage the engine. The repairs would not be
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in covered by your warranty. Always follow the
kPa (kilopascals). maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. Hybrid manual for more information.
When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure
zone, the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
message will appear in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65
and Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
3-51
Oil Pressure Light This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned. When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
Check your oil as soon as possible and have is not flowing through your engine properly. You could
your vehicle serviced. be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance Security Light
may damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the For information regarding
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing this light and the vehicle’s
engine oil. security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-22.
3-52
Fog Lamp Light Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light will This light comes on when
come on when the fog the high-beam headlamps
lamps are in use. are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
See Fog Lamps on page 3-18 for more information. for more information.
Cruise Control Light Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on This light comes on when
whenever you set the the Tow/Haul mode has
cruise control. been activated.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-37.
See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information.
3-53
Fuel Gage Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about Hybrid manual for more information.
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear in the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65
3-54
Low Fuel Warning Light Driver Information Center (DIC)
This light, under the fuel Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
gage, will come on briefly The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
when you are starting displays warning messages if a system problem is
the engine. detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
This light and a chime will come on when the fuel tank is delay, the DIC will display the information that was
low on fuel. There will also be a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” last displayed before the engine was turned off.
message on the Driver Information Center, see DIC If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for more Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
information. When you add fuel this light and message DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced. page 3-73 for the displays available.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
3-55
DIC Operation and Displays DIC Buttons
(With DIC Buttons) The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below information, customization,
explains the operation of this system. and set/reset buttons.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed The button functions
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument are detailed in the
panel, next to the steering wheel. following pages.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature.
Buttons)” later in this section. Some vehicles also display instantaneous economy and
an Active Fuel Management™ indicator.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings, engine hours,
and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming.
3-56
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the Trip Odometer
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-73 for display shows the current distance traveled in either
more information. miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages will also display the trip odometer.
on the DIC. The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed
by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
the following menu items: reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
Odometer was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
the odometer. kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
To switch between English and metric measurements, begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
see “Units” later in this section. mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
3-57
Fuel Range Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate number of This display shows the approximate average miles
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
be driven without refueling. The display will show This number is calculated based on the number of
LOW if the fuel level is low. mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history hold the set/reset button.
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change. Fuel Used
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
stops, this display may read one number, but if This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
3-58
Timer Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. Management™ Indicator
This display can be used as a timer. If your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuel button
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while until INST ECONOMY V8 MODE displays. This display
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount shows the current fuel economy at a particular
of time that has passed since the timer was last reset, moment and will change frequently as driving conditions
not including time the ignition is off. Time will continue to change. This display shows the instantaneous fuel
be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
display is being shown on the DIC. The timer will record 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average economy,
up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) this screen cannot be reset.
after which the display will return to zero. An Active Fuel Management™ indicator will display on
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while the right side of the DIC, while INST ECONOMY
TIMER is displayed. displays on the left side. Active Fuel Management™
allows the engine to operate on either four or eight
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset cylinders, depending on your driving demands. When
button while TIMER is displayed. Active Fuel Management™ is active, V4 MODE will
display on the DIC. When Active Fuel Management™
Transmission Temperature is inactive, V8 MODE will display. See Active Fuel
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays. Management™ on page 2-31 for more information.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or Blank Display
degrees Celsius (°C). This display shows no information.
3-59
Vehicle Information Menu Items Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
T(Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
through the following menu items: accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
Oil Life next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate Units
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system displays. This display allows you to select between
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
with your driving conditions. display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. selected.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-65. You should Tire Pressure
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
more information. TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
3-60
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the system while driving, a message advising you the first transmitter at the same time for about
to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the 15 seconds.
display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65 for transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
more information. the second will match driver 2.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this is matched.
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
Engine Hours repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE transmitters matched to it.
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Relearn Remote Key
Blank Display
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE This display shows no information.
transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3-61
DIC Operation and Displays Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
(Without DIC Buttons) Odometer
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
information below explains the operation of this system. displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the Engine Hours
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
messages. LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information, viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
and warning messages if a system problem is detected. number of hours the engine has run.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can
use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
Trip Odometer
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, oil life, Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, This display shows the current distance traveled in
and display language. either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip for the trip odometer.
odometer reset stem to view the following displays: The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, and display holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
language. odometer is displayed.
3-62
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active Oil Life
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P).
ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds. current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last with your driving conditions.
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display Warnings and Messages on page 3-65. You should
will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
3-63
Relearn Remote Key Language
To access this display, the vehicle must be in PARK (P). This display allows you to select the language in which
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
RKE transmitter to your vehicle: ODOMETER displays.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN 2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
REMOTE KEY displays. the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for the currently set language displays.
three seconds. 3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
will display. The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
first transmitter at the same time for about NO CHANGE.
15 seconds. 4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
3-64
DIC Warnings and Messages CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message.
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information
another. on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on
page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
Some messages may not require immediate action, but for more information.
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the This message displays when the pressure in one or
messages and to clear them from the display. more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
display because they are more urgent. These messages FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
require action before they can be cleared. You should tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
take any messages that appear on the display seriously one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
and remember that clearing the messages will only messages that may have been sent at the same
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
The following are the possible messages that can be
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
displayed and some information about them.
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Information label. See Tires on page 5-63, Loading Your
Hybrid manual for more information. Vehicle on page 4-35, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
See “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is low,
the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-47.
3-65
DRIVER DOOR OPEN ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
see if the message still appears on the DIC. as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-31
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) This message displays when the engine coolant
TURNED OFF temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
This message displays when the engine coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-47.
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-47. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air page 5-33 for information on driving to a safe place
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. in an emergency.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on. ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
You can continue to drive your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
If this message continues to appear, have the system is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
to avoid damage to the engine. panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-31
3-66
This message displays and a chime sounds if the FUEL LEVEL LOW
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating on page 3-54 and Fuel on page 5-5 for more information.
temperature.
HOOD OPEN
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood
This message displays and a chime sounds when the is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again.
further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
Engine Overheating on page 5-31 for further information.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
to your destination. The performance may be reduced the door for obstructions, and close the door again.
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
3-67
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine This message displays and a chime sounds if the
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle door for obstructions, and close the door again.
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information. REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays if low oil pressure levels This message displays and a chime sounds if the
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. on the DIC display.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
PARK ASSIST OFF
This message displays while you are matching a
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
this message displays to remind the driver that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
the URPA system has been turned off. Press the on page 2-5 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem to Buttons) on page 3-56 or DIC Operation and Displays
acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-62 for more
display. To turn the URPA system back on, see information.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-58.
3-68
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) This message displays if there is a problem with the
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3-40 and Airbag System on page 1-76 for more
on page 2-5. information.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING

This message displays and a chime sounds if the SYSTEM
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
check the door for obstructions, and close the door conditions, the charging system light may also turn
again. Check to see if the message still appears on on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
the DIC. Light on page 3-43. Driving with this problem could
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE Have the electrical system checked as soon as
This message displays if a problem occurs with the possible. See your dealer/retailer.
four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC This message displays along with the brake system
display. If the message is still displayed or appears warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
again when you begin driving, the four-wheel-drive See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45. If this
system needs service. See your dealer/retailer. message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving,
the brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-69
SERVICE BRAKES SOON SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the If your vehicle has the Autoride® suspension system,
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as this message displays when the Autoride® suspension
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If the message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service. SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
See your dealer/retailer. This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
SERVICE PARK ASSIST restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 2-24 for more
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this information.
system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 2-58 for more information. SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
See your dealer/retailer for service.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
SERVICE STABILITRAK Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
displays, it means there may be a problem with the page 3-47. Several conditions may cause this message
StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try to reset to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least page 5-73 for more information. If the warning comes on
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should See your dealer/retailer.
see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is
safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit
of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
3-70
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control • One condition is overheating, which could occur if
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. period of time.
See your dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrak® • The message also displays if the brake system
System on page 4-6 for more information. warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-45.
STABILITRAK OFF • The message could display if the stability system
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when the stability checks due to driving conditions.
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel • The message displays if an engine or vehicle
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
enhancement system, you should normally leave
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak®
off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or • The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to into 4LO.
free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is caused the message to be displayed are no longer
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-33. present.
To turn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
3-71
TIGHTEN GAS CAP TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message may display along with the check engine If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
Indicator Lamp on page 3-48. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. System on page 4-6 for more information.
See Filling the Tank on page 5-9. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn transmission fluid is overheating and the
this light and message off. transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on overheated transmission fluid or while the
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after transmission temperature warning is displayed.
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-75, This message displays along with a continuous chime if
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-71, and the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 for more with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
information. damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message
clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
3-72
TURN SIGNAL ON DIC Vehicle Customization
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn (With DIC Buttons)
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the
turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position. Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
This message displays when the windshield washer to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview All of the customization options may not be available
on page 5-14 for the location of the windshield on your vehicle. Only the options available will be
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer displayed on the DIC.
Fluid on page 5-40 for more information. The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
3-73
Entering the Feature Settings Menu DISPLAY LANGUAGE
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in This feature allows you to select the language in which
PARK (P). the DIC messages will appear.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
recommended that the headlamps are turned off. LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through the Press the set/reset button once to access the settings
available customizable options. for this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Feature Settings Menu Items ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle: FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
This feature will only display if a language other than NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
English has been set. This feature allows you to change The current setting will remain.
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
You can also change the language by pressing the
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
trip odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
DIC messages in English.
this section for more information.
3-74
AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more you to select which doors and when the doors will
information. automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
button once to access the settings for this feature. UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
Then press the customization button to scroll through set/reset button once to access the settings for this
the following settings: feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
PARK (P). DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
three seconds. when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when
The current setting will remain. the key is taken out of the ignition.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
3-75
REMOTE DOOR LOCK REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5
information. for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
button once to access the settings for this feature. set/reset button once to access the settings for this
Then press the customization button to scroll through feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
the following settings: through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press transmitter.
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter,
and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
again within five seconds of the previous command. desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-76
DELAY DOOR LOCK EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not the This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed. want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
When locking the doors and liftgate with the power enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
press the customization button to scroll through the
this feature to work. You can temporarily override following settings:
delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch
twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice. OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
See Delayed Locking on page 2-11 for more information.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR for 30 seconds.
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
Then press the customization button to scroll through one minute.
the following settings:
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the two minutes.
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
3-77
APPROACH LIGHTING CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select whether or not to This feature allows you to select the volume level of
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light the chime.
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
Press the customization button until APPROACH once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the the customization button to scroll through the following
set/reset button once to access the settings for settings:
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings: NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle The current setting will remain.
with the RKE transmitter. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock stay at the last known setting.
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Operation on page 2-5 for more information.
3-78
PARK TILT MIRRORS EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-6
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-57 for more information. for more information.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
set/reset button once to access the settings for once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
this feature. Then press the customization button to the customization button to scroll through the following
scroll through the following settings: settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be is removed from the ignition.
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R).
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
REVERSE (R). the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside recall took place prior to removing the key again.
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
3-79
MEMORY SEAT RECALL REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
your preference for the remote memory seat recall remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
on page 1-6 for more information. the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for more information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until REMOTE START
button once to access the settings for this feature. appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
Then press the customization button to scroll through once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the following settings: the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature. The current setting will remain.
feature, the pedals will also automatically move. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-56 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
page 3-62 for more information on matching transmitters
to driver ID numbers.
3-80
FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
Press the customization button until FACTORY FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
scroll through the following settings: again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings. Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
not be set to their factory default settings. the following occurs:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the • The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. • The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
3-81
Audio System(s) While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its • Familiarize yourself with its operation.
features. • Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
{CAUTION: conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings. Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
Giving extended attention to entertainment your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio,
make sure that it can be added by checking with
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules
your eyes on the road and your mind on the covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching equipment can be added, it is very important to
while driving. do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and even damage them.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here are operation of sound equipment that has been added.
some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving. Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-27 for more
information.
3-82
Setting the Clock Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
Single CD and DVD Player to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD
and DVD player, it has a H button for setting the time To change the time or date default settings, follow these
instructions:
and date.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions: 1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, displayed on the radio screen until the time
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
displays. (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month)
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the are displayed.
labels that you want to change. Every time the 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if option.
selected, increases by one.
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
• Another way to increase the time or date, default, or let the screen time out.
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the
\FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease, press the left ©SEEK arrow or
the sREV (reverse) button. You can also
turn the f knob, located on the upper right side
of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
3-83
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player Changing the Time and Date Default
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
Settings
radio has a MENU button instead of the H button to You can change the time default setting from 12 hours
set the time and date. to 24 hours or change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
To change the time or date default settings, follow these
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option instructions:
displays, press the pushbutton located under
that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY 1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
(hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays. displays, press the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
labels that you want to change. Every time the and the date MM/DD (month and day) and
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if DD/MM (day and month) displays.
selected, increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
• Another way to increase the time or date, option.
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or the 3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
\FWD (forward) button. default, or let the screen time out.
3. To decrease, press the left ©SEEK arrow or
the sREV (reverse) button. You can also turn
the f knob, located on the upper right side of the
radio, to adjust the selected setting.
3-84
Radio(s) (MP3)
Radio with CD and DVD
Radio with CD shown, Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
Radio with Six-Disc CD similar system.
3-85
Radios with CD and DVD Playing the Radio
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround O(Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
Sound System. Some of its features are explained and off.
later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-113 Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed The volume level should be consistent while you drive.
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital To activate SCV:
Theater Systems, Inc.). 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories. 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of setup menu.
Dolby® Laboratories.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
Radio Data System (RDS) (automatic volume) label on the radio displays.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). 4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies or High) to select the level of radio volume
upon receiving specific information from these stations compensation. The display times out after
and only works when the information is available. approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the increases the audio volume to compensate for
station name or call letters displays. In rare cases, faster vehicle speeds.
a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
3-86
Finding a Station Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™ Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
(if equipped). The selection displays. favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations. steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature.
©SEEK ¨: Press either SEEK arrow to go to the See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
previous or to the next station and stay there. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning. Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
strong signal that are in the selected band. combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
and RDS Features): Press this button to display adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
additional text information related to the current FM-RDS
or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional To store a station as a favorite, perform the
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and following steps:
CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing this 1. Tune to the desired radio station.
button to highlight the desired label, or press the 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the station is to be stored.
the information about that label displays. 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
When information is not available, No Info displays.
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-87
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites SEEK arrow, \FWD (forward), or sREV (reverse)
pages, perform the following steps: button until the desired levels are obtained. If a
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio station’s frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease
setup menu. the treble.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
FAV 1-6 label.
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
pressing the pushbutton located below the A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
displayed page numbers. position.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
the radio station frequency labels and to begin middle position, press the f knob for more than
the process of programming your favorites for the two seconds.
chosen amount of numbered pages.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
Setting the Tone types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
(Bass/Midrange/Treble) jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): treble settings.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton If your radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob are either MANUAL or TALK.
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
3-88
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the the following:
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or 1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. displays. Press the CAT button to display the
Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
SEEK arrow, \FWD, or sREV button until the until the desired category name displays.
desired levels are obtained. • Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, category list by pressing the sREV button or
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or the \FWD button.
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds 2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
and the level adjusts to the middle position. category label to immediately tune to the first
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the XM™ station associated with that category.
middle position, press the f knob for more than 3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
two seconds. or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
disables FADE and the rear speakers mute. within the selected category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
3-89
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through Radio Messages
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following: Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
setup menu.
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
CAT label.
Locked: This message displays when the
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
removed. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
label until the category name along with the word corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Removed displays.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed provinces. XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton of programming and commercial-free music,
under the Restore All label. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
Categories cannot be removed or added while the trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). access to XM™ Radio Online for when you are not in
your vehicle. A service fee is required to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™
at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677
in Canada.
3-90
Radio Messages for XM™ Only To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-111 later in this 1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
section for further detail. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
Playing a CD (Single CD Player) the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. 3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the To insert a CD while the ignition is off, first press
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs. the Zbutton or the DISP knob.
To insert one CD, do the following: If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
1. Press and release the ^ button. radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc. stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
label side up. The player pulls the CD in. As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
3-91
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or Care of Your CDs
CD Slot) If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording,
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. the quality of the music that has been recorded, and
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle
in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
a DVD, depending on media type and format ranges. original cases or other protective cases and away from
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the direct sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. the CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not
The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this
faceplate or by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the
(RSA) on page 3-122 for more information. The DVD/CD outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft,
is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible with lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s. neutral detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD the wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
symbol displays on the left side of the radio display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number Care of Your CD and DVD Player
displays. Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
3-92
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an currently playing.
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the ©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign next track.
materials, liquids, and debris.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
section. on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on
the CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to eject right arrow to go to the next track.
the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from a
radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom slot. If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the player continues moving backward or forward through
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc can be the tracks on the CD.
removed. If the disc is not removed, after several
seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into the player. sREV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume
two seconds to eject all discs. playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the \FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
disc that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
3-93
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
order. To use random: listening.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the radio while a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD
CD player. A RDM label displays. remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing
To play the tracks from the single CD in random entertainment.
order, press the pushbutton positioned under CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play. showing the disc and/or track number displays when a
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
player, press and hold the ^button. A beep sounds
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
discs partway into the slot of the CD player. displays.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
to turn off random play. showing the track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and
To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
with CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
partway into the slot. A RDM label displays.
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the
To play tracks from a single CD in random order, CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM two sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input
label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,
pushbutton again to turn off random play. the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
3-94
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-113 for
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System more information.
on page 3-113 for more information. In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat speakers can be muted when the RSA power is
operator can turn on the video screen and use turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-122
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) for more information.
through the remote control.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output Radios with a Single CD or a Six-Disc CD player have
Only one audio source can be heard through the the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
speakers at a time. An audio source is defined as For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R
DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Press the Obutton to turn the radio on. The radio can Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers. CD-RW Disc
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM, Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of
or XM™) by pressing the BAND button or the playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front, information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
or rear auxiliary input (if available). CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the
front seat passengers are able to listen to playback
from this source through the vehicle speakers.
3-95
CD Messages If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or displays an error message, write it down and provide it
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other Using the DVD Player
messages when an error occurs:
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down. remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-113
unknown format.
and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-122 for more
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT information.
problems.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
normal, the CD should play. most DVDs.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
road becomes smoother, the CD should play. audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3
and WMA formats.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again. If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
• There could have been a problem while burning Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-113
the CD. and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
• The label could be caught in the CD player. more information.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
3-96
Playing a DVD A lock symbol displays next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until this knob
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle is pressed and held for more than two seconds again, or
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD,
is in either slot. Press this button again and the to manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input date settings, while in the clock or date setting mode.
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable See the information given earlier in this section specific
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” to the radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the the Clock” in the index, for setting the clock and date.
CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the ©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the
two sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input
left arrow to return to the start of the current track or
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
track or chapter. This button might not work when the
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) SEEK ¨(Next Track/Chapter): Press the right
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System arrow to go to the next track or chapter. This button
on page 3-113 for more information. might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn information or the previews.
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease sREV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
system, and to start the parental control feature. fast reversing, press again. This button might not
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or or the previews.
remote control.
3-97
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD r/ j(Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
forwarding, press again. This button might not work arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
the previews. system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or DVD.
If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds. finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio.
to eject, press and hold this button for more than If the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
five seconds to force the disc to eject. instructions, if available.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons c(Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option highlighted in any menu.
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information. y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V menus menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote located under the navigation arrows to navigate
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
on page 3-113 for more information. The Video Screen selection press this button. This button only operates
automatically turns on when the DVD-V is inserted into when using a DVD.
the DVD slot.
3-98
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for q Group r: Press to cycle through musical
navigating through the menus. groupings on the DVD-A disc.
q(Return): Press to exit the current active menu Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
and return to the previous menu. This button operates navigating through the menus.
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active. e(Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons screen shows the audio stream changing.
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the Inserting a Disc
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus loading the disc into the system and shows “Loading
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
on page 3-113 for more information. The Video Screen automatically play the movie while others default to
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is the softkey menu display, which requires the radio’s
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned on Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed.
by the rear seat occupant through the remote control The rear seat passenger can also start the disc with the
power button. remote control.
r/ j(Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
forward arrow is showing on the display, the system is
in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the
display, the system is in playback mode.
3-99
Stopping and Resuming Playback If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD, the movie
when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again.
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot
press the cbutton on the remote control, or press the be completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause to eject, press and hold the DVD Z button more
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
DVD Radio Error Messages
To resume DVD playback, press the r/ jbutton
Player Error: This message displays when there are
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
disc load or eject problems.
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote the disc is damaged.
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control, Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc. is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc
Ejecting a Disc
is present when the Zor DVD/CD AUX button is
Press the Zbutton on the radio to eject the disc. pressed on the radio.
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,
the radio reloads the disc after a short period
of time. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio
does not resume play of the disc automatically.
3-100
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an turn it off.
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, portable audio device is playing. Press again and
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to the system begins playing audio from the connected
the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source. portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction. through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. track or chapter number displays when a disc is in
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX either slot. Press this button again and the system
button to begin playing audio from the device over automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
the vehicle speakers. such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
device’s volume to the loudest level. DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
It is always best to power your portable audio device and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
through its own battery while playing. front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
might have to be made from the portable device if the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-113
volume is not loud or soft enough. for more information.
3-101
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or • Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
Six-Disc CD Player) and files to read and play.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a using one folder for each album. Each folder
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with or album should contain 18 songs or less.
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
album are available for display by the radio when
a particular folder during playback.
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
Compressed Audio (other file extensions might not work).
The radio also plays discs that contain both • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side combination of a large number of files and folders,
of the screen but plays both file formats in the order or playlists could cause the player to be unable
in which they were recorded to the disc. to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
MP3 Format playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large
number of files, folders, playlists or sessions,
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer: minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R name. Long names also take up more space on the
display, potentially getting cut off.
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on • Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
one disc. add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
3-102
Playlists can be changed by using the Sc (previous) No Folder
and c T(next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
©SEEK ¨ arrows. You can also play an MP3 CD-R are located under the root folder. The next and previous
or CD-RW that was recorded using no file folders. If a folder function does not display on a CD that was
CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of recorded without folders or playlists.
50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum, audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
but all items over the maximum are not accessible. root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
files, the directory displays as the CD label. All files the following order:
contained directly under the root directory are accessed • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists and continues sequentially through all tracks in
(Px) are always accessed before root folders or files. each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) has played, play continues from the first track of
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called the first playlist.
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc. • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
Empty Directory or Folder folder. When the last track of the last folder has
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the played, play continues from the first track of the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no first folder.
compressed files directly beneath them, the player When play enters a new folder, the display does not
advances to the next folder in the file structure automatically show the new folder name unless you
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
does not display. The new track name displays.
3-103
File System and Naming As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
text and the extension of the filename does not display. be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
Preprogrammed Playlists automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using button for two seconds to eject all discs.
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special CD-R currently playing.
folders containing compressed audio song files.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
Playing an MP3 start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing. Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When the in the previous folder.
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
audio source. under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
3-104
sREV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. You will feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file below the music navigator label. The player scans the
displays. disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It could take several minutes to scan the
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. You will the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this button to it is scanning the disc in the background. When the
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing
displays. again.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or playing is shown on the second line of the display
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
one of the following: are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
playing MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listen
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
to MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbutton
under the RDM label until Random Current
located below either arrow button. You will go to
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
turn off random play.
Continue pressing either button until the desired
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD artist is displayed.
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
3-105
To change from playback by artist to playback by Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons DVD Player)
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator screen. MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Now the album name is displayed on the second line
between the arrows and songs from the current Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album The radio also plays discs that contain both
are played, the player moves to the next album in uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into.
playing MP3 files from that album. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton audio (.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA files on the
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback. DVD deck. On the CD deck, press the CAT (category)
button to toggle between compressed and
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when uncompressed audio format, the default being the
a CD is playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio uncompressed format (.CDA).
for future listening.
MP3/WMA Format
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
message showing disc and/or track number displays computer:
when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and • Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary CD-R or CD-RW disc.
input device such as a portable audio player. If a • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device one disc.
Found” displays. • The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
3-106
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find Root Directory
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
using one folder for each album. Each folder a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
or album should contain 18 songs or less. files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to contained directly under the root directory are accessed
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce (Px) are always accessed before root folders or files.
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback. Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
extension as other file extensions might not work. compressed files directly beneath them, the player
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist advances to the next folder in the file structure that
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
combination of a large number of files and folders, does not display.
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, No Folder
playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, are located under the root folder. The next and previous
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist folder function does not function on a CD that was
name. Long names also take up more space on the recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
display, potentially getting cut off. the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
not to function in the player. root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
3-107
Order of Play Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
the following order: WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
and continues sequentially through all tracks in using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist folders containing compressed audio song files.
has played, play continues from the first track of Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD
the first playlist.
or CD Slot)
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
folder. When the last track of the last folder has bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
played, play continues from the first track of the the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
first folder. Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
When play enters a new folder, the display does not appears and allows navigation of the disc. The
automatically show the new folder name unless you menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play
have chosen the folder mode as the default display. order), a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to
The new track name displays. move up or down through available folders), a PL tag if
the disc has a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator
File System and Naming tag. If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings
up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously
The song name that is displayed is the song name that is described.
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R or
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When you
turn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R starts to play
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays. As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
3-108
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject © SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player. the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, Sc(Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
press and hold this button for more than five seconds positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
to force the disc to eject. in the previous folder.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject cT(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the next folder.
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not sREV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R automatically reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more the file displays.
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
\FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing. file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
3-109
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
files from the CD-R or CD-RW you are listening to between the arrows. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned files by another artist, press the pushbutton located
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc below either arrow button. The disc goes to the next or
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing
random play. either button until the desired artist is displayed.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
located below the music navigator label. The player album button. Press the pushbutton below the back
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the the album name displays on the second line between
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files the arrows and songs from the current album begin
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning, on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
press the pushbutton located below the music files from that album.
navigator label or eject the disc.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
in the background. When the scan is finished, the playback.
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
3-110
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a XM Radio Messages
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment. XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc being updated, and no action is required. This process
is in either slot. Press this button again and the should take no longer than 30 seconds.
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the should return.
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
button cycles through all available options, such as: processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary This message should disappear shortly.
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, service. Tune to another channel.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-113
for more information. Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
station was one of the presets, choose another station
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the
for that preset button.
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control. No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
3-111
No Title Info: No song title information is available at Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
this time on this channel. The system is working channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
properly. with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
this time on this channel. The system is working within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
properly. fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
available at this time on this channel. The system is within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
working properly. fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly. Navigation/Radio System
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
could have previously been in another vehicle. The navigation system has built-in features intended to
For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
swapped between vehicles. If this message appears matter how advanced, can never replace your own
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
dealer/retailer. tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
3-112
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) Parental Control
System The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio you have. To enable
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the for more than two seconds to stop all system features
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two
wireless headphones, and a remote control. See The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
Radio(s) (MP3) on page 3-85 for more information on the power button, but the RSE system will remain
the vehicle’s audio/DVD system. under Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
Before You Drive power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. returns from where it was previously left and the padlock
The driver cannot safely view the video screen icon disappears from the radio display.
while driving and should not try to do so. Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the
system might not work until the temperature is within radio DVD display menu, or changing an ignition
the operating range. The operating range for the position.
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
3-113
Headphones If your vehicle has a third row video screen display,
it has two additional headphones.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light
does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section
for more information. Switch the headphones to Off
when not in use.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out
of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours of
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
continuous use.
dedicated to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, volume control located on the right side.
DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
has this feature. The wireless headphones have the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be
an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
control. on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should
be positioned on the right ear.
3-114
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the allow audio or video signals to be connected from
battery door open. an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using or cables (not included) might be required to connect
the diagram on the inside of the battery the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
compartment. manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw. The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
dry place.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
3-115
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, Audio Output
connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD heard through the following possible sources:
player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on • Wireless Headphones
the remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can • Vehicle Speakers
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device • Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) (MP3) on audio system, if your vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
How to Change the RSE Video Screen the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
Settings information.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if your
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
any feature, do the following: selected as an audio source on the RSA system.
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-122 for more
control. information.
2. Use the remote control n, q, p, o (navigation) When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this
arrows and the r (enter) button to use the feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio
setup menu. from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
menu from the screen. listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
3-116
Video Screen Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console. To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
To use the video screen, do the following:
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
1. Push the release button located on the overhead could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
console. signals from the remote control. If the remote control
2. Move the screen to the desired position. does not seem to be working, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
locked position. affect the function of the remote control.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and control power button can be used to turn on the video
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) (MP3)
disc to turn off the screen. on page 3-85 for more information.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
for the remote control. They are located at the rear will not be covered by your warranty. Storage in
of the console. extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-117
Remote Control Buttons y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o(Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the

arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the

brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q(Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
on and off. menu is active.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
control backlight on. The backlight automatically reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
pressed while the backlight is on.
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
v (Title):Press this button to return the DVD to the DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause
main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for each it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
disc.
3-118
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio, [ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
you might be able to do slow play by pressing the the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
play/pause button then pressing the fast forward button. video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode. You forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release this button.
can also, depending on the radio, perform reverse slow This button might not work when the DVD is playing the
play by pressing the play/pause button and then copyright information or the previews.
pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play
mode, press the play/pause button. e(Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks on
DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
t(Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to The format and content of this function vary for
return to the start of the current track or chapter. each disc.
Press this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD { (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
is playing the copyright information or the previews. subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the vary for each disc.
beginning of the next chapter or track. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
information or the previews. between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
r(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse

d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, playing. The format and content of this function vary
press the play button. To stop fast reversing a DVD for each disc.
audio or CD, release this button. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
or the previews. provides the capability of direct chapter or track number
selection.
3-119
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after Problem Recommended Action
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical inputs. No power. The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to ACC/ACCESSORY.
select chapter or track numbers greater than nine.
The picture does not fill Check the display mode
Press this button before entering the number. the screen. There are settings in the setup menu
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new black borders on the by pressing the display
universal remote control can be purchased. If this top and bottom or on menu button on the
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses both sides or it looks remote control.
stretched out.
a code set of Toshiba®.
In auxiliary mode, the Check the auxiliary input
Battery Replacement picture moves or scrolls. connections at both
devices.
To change the remote control batteries, do the following: The remote control does Check to make sure there
1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control. not work. is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. transmitter window.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using Check the batteries to
the diagram on the inside of the battery make sure they are not
compartment. dead or installed
3. Replace the battery cover. incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes
dry place. off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD
beginning. was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
3-120
Problem Recommended Action DVD Display Error Messages
The auxiliary source is Check that the RSE video The DVD display error message depends on which
running but there is no screen is in the auxiliary radio is in your vehicle. The video screen can display
picture or sound. source mode.
one of the following:
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both Disc Load/Eject Error: Displays when there are disc
devices. load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception Disc Format Error: Displays if the disc is inserted with
or buzzes. range, and interference the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your Disc Region Error: Displays if the disc is not from
cellular telephone in the a correct region.
vehicle.
Check that the No Disc Inserted: Displays if no disc is present when
headphones are on EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio.
correctly using the
L (left) and R (right)
on the headphones.
I lost the remote and/or See your dealer/retailer
the headphones. for assistance.
The DVD is playing, Check that the RSE video
but there is no picture screen is sourced to the
or sound. DVD player.
3-121
DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies. or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when passengers can only control the music sources the front
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. seat passengers are not listening to (except on some
radios where dual control is allowed). For example, rear
*Excludes the OnStar® System. seat passengers can control and listen to a CD through
the headphones, while the driver listens to the radio
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. You can operate the RSA functions even when the
main radio is off. The front audio system will display the
Cleaning the Video Screen headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear
from the display when it is off.
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If your
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.
vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
3-122
© ¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the left ©or right ¨seek arrow
to go to the previous or to the next station or channel
and stay there. This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio.
Press and hold the left ©or right ¨seek arrow until
the display flashes, to tune to an individual station.
The display stops flashing after the buttons have not
been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the left ©seek arrow to
go back to the start of the current track or chapter
P(Power): Press the Pbutton to turn the RSA (if more than ten seconds have played). Press the
on or off. right ¨seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter on
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the the disc. This function is inactive, with some radios,
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
the left headphones and the right knob controls the When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
right headphones. left ©or right ¨seek arrow to perform a cursor up
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between or down on the menu. Hold the left ©or right ¨arrow
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if to perform a cursor left or right on the menu.
your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
3-123
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the Audio Steering Wheel Controls
next preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the Vehicles with audio
front seat passengers are listening to the radio. steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this your vehicle’s options.
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. Some audio controls can
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the be adjusted at the steering
front seat passengers are listening to the disc. wheel. They include the
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, following:
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, enter.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the down or up arrow to
Theft-Deterrent Feature go to the next or to the previous radio station stored
as a favorite.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by When a CD/DVD is playing, press either arrow to go to
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number the next or previous track or chapter.
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could display. g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this
®
button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio
With THEFTLOCK activated, the radio does not of the wireless and wired headphones, if your vehicle
operate if stolen. has these features, does not mute. Press and release
this button again, to turn the sound on.
3-124
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press and Radio Reception
hold this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Frequency interference and static can occur during
Navigation System manual for more information. normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
for longer than one second to interact with the power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation item from the accessory power outlet.
system, press and hold this button for longer than
one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” AM
to enter OnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System on
page 2-60 in this manual for more information. The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between station frequencies to interfere with each other.
the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and the power levels during the day, and then reduce
rear auxiliary. these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume. your radio.
¨(Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio FM Stereo
station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press
the seek arrow to go to the next track or chapter FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the seek reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
arrow to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
player, if multiple discs are loaded. sound to fade in and out.
3-125
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous radio reception. Any damage caused to your
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio be covered by your warranty.
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, Because this antenna is built into the rear side windows,
bridges, garages, or through tunnels could cause loss there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
of the XM signal for a period of time. The radio may and vandals.
display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference. If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone
to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to
Rear Side Window Antenna the glass, make sure you do not damage the grid
lines for the AM-FM antennas or place the cellular
Your AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear telephone antenna over the grid lines.
side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear
side windows are not scratched and that the lines on XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces
are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception. System
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
radio reception or damage the rear window ice build up for clear radio reception.
defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
side windows with sharp objects.
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
3-126
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-28
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-28
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2 Winter Driving ..............................................4-30
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Braking .........................................................4-4 Ice, or Snow .............................................4-33
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-34
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-6 Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-34
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-6 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-35
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-41
Steering ........................................................4-9 Towing ..........................................................4-45
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-45
Passing .......................................................4-11 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-45
Loss of Control .............................................4-11 Level Control ...............................................4-48
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-13 Autoride® .....................................................4-49
Driving at Night ............................................4-26 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-49
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-26 Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-63
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-28
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Drunk Driving
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for judgment can be affected by even a small
Everyone on page 1-30. amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
{CAUTION: has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
Assume that other road users (pedestrians, drink.
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
a global tragedy. system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
attentiveness.
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor person had not been drinking.
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than Control of a Vehicle
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been The following three systems help to control your vehicle
associated with the use of alcohol, with about while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
250,000 people injured. times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every more of those control systems than the tires and
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
psychological, and developmental reasons for vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6.
these laws. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and Modifications on page 5-3.
then drive.
4-3
Braking Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
Hybrid manual for more information. a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-45.
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
Braking action involves perception time and reaction with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring That means better braking and longer brake life.
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the
second. But that is only an average. It might be less pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops,
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or you will still have some power brake assist. But you will
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a harder to push.
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
emergency, so keeping enough space between
Modifications on page 5-3.
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
4-4
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
advanced electronic braking system that will help happens with ABS:
prevent a braking skid. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
When you start the engine and begin to drive away, one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This and at both rear wheels.
is normal. ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
If there is a problem with
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
ABS, this warning light will
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
Light on page 3-46. on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem, front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on have ABS.
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
4-5
Using ABS When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive away,
the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal there are no problems. You may hear or feel the system
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is problem with your vehicle. The system should initialize
normal. before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some
cases, it may take approximately two miles of driving
Braking in Emergencies before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak®
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In
light along with one of the following messages will be
many emergencies, steering can help you more than
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
even the very best braking.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
Locking Rear Axle STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak® system has not been turned
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle off using the StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn the
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the to the three o’clock position. If this clears the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction message(s), your vehicle does not need servicing. If this
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle
traction to move the vehicle. off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to
reset the system. If any of these messages still
StabiliTrak® System appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), your
vehicle should be taken in for service. For more
Your vehicle may have the StabiliTrak® system which information on the DIC messages, see Driver
combines antilock brake, traction and stability control Information Center (DIC) on page 3-55.
systems and helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
4-6
The StabiliTrak® light will When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off, the
flash on the instrument StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCS off or
panel cluster when StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed on the DIC to
the system is both on and warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction
activated. control when traction control is off, but will not be able to
use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned off,
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is you may still hear system noises as a result of the
normal. brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
The traction control disable driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
button is located on the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
instrument panel below the snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
climate controls. free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-33.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be turned automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak® light will come
off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button on and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on
if both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak®) were the DIC. Both traction control and StabiliTrak® are
previously on. To disable both traction control and automatically disabled in this condition.
StabiliTrak®, press and hold the button for five seconds.
Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if
not automatically shut off for any other reason.
4-7
Traction Control Operation The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak® acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing of the transmission. When this happens, you may
engine power to the wheels (engine speed notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
management) and by applying brakes to each individual or vibration. This is normal.
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
The traction control system is enabled automatically activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the cruise
when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the control will automatically disengage. When road
StabiliTrak® light will flash if it senses that any of the conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on
driving. If you turn off traction control, only the page 3-12.
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled. StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can problem does not clear itself after restarting the
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly. vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer for service.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin

excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS and brake
warning lights and the SERVICE STABILITRAK
message are displayed, you could damage the
transfer case. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Reduce engine power and do not
spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
this message are displayed.
4-8
Steering Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
Hybrid manual for more information. their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
Power Steering places. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-6.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
it will take much more effort. the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Steering Tips Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
wheels are straight ahead.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you accelerate gently into the straightaway.
will understand this. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at Modifications on page 5-3.
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-9
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 4-4. It is better to remove as much speed as you
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Off-Road Recovery Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
driving. we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the Let us review what driving experts say about what
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the happens when the three control systems — brakes,
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to asked.
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
straight down the roadway. and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-11
Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
those conditions. But skids are always possible. vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the accelerator pedal. the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an acceleration avoid only the braking skid.
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-12
Off-Road Driving The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and snap
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel features are accessible from underneath the front fascia.
drive. Also, see Braking on page 4-4. If your vehicle The following steps must be performed on the bolts
does not have four-wheel drive, you should not and snap features to remove the air dam:
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. 2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on the
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough snap features and disengage the snaps.
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. 3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is is free.
the terrain itself. When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North replace the air dam.
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no periods without the front fascia lower air dam
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature. Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that dam when you are finished off-road driving.
is why it is very important that you read this guide. You To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more 1. Line up the snap features and push the air dam
enjoyable. rearward to engage the snaps.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance 2. Install the two outboard bolts.
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam.
4-13
Before You Go Off-Roading Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
There are some things to do before you go out. For Driving
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
{CAUTION:
your four-wheel-drive or all-wheel-drive vehicle in
this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully • Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should the seatbacks can be thrown forward
be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading during a sudden stop. You or your
where you will be driving? If you do not know, you passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
should check with law enforcement people in the area. below the top of the seatbacks.
Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be • Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
sure to get the necessary permission. tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
4-14
There are some important things to remember about • Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
how to load your vehicle. removed from any campsite before leaving.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and • Take extreme care with open fires (where
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
forward as you can.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on combustible materials that could catch fire from
the off-road terrain does not toss things around. the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35 and Tires Traveling to Remote Areas
on page 5-63. It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
Environmental Concerns route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
recreation. However, it also raises environmental any blocked or closed roads.
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
the environment: can help quickly.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
have been specially set aside for public off-road the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations. can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage how to use it properly.
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over soft
ground.
4-15
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe {CAUTION:
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
skills. Here is what we mean.
quick changes in direction can easily throw
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your you out of position. This could cause you to
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain lose control and crash. So, whether you are
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen driving on or off the road, you and your
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
passengers should wear safety belts.
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road Scanning the Terrain
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
in mind. At higher speeds: of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
• You approach things faster and you have less time consider.
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• You have less time to react. Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive over or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
obstacles. acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
• You will need more distance for braking, especially ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
since you are on an unpaved surface.
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking
distances.
4-16
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these sudden turns, or sudden braking.
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
things to consider: There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
• Is the path ahead clear? lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
There is more discussion of these subjects later. very time you need special alertness and driving
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
quickly? affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or drinking. See Drunk Driving on page 4-2.
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
4-17
Driving on Off-Road Hills Approaching a Hill
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is one
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend, or
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. with only a small change in elevation where you can
easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline
may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see
this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,
{CAUTION: grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. a hill.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive • Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
down them, you cannot control your speed. If sharply steeper in places?
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
surface cause tire slipping?
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-18
Driving Uphill • Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps. • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel. • Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make your vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to start
spinning or sliding. {CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
{CAUTION: can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
Turning or driving across steep hills can be vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be and stay alert.
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up. There are some things you should do if the vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill:
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
the path twists and turns, you might want to find from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
another route. brake.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of • If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to
the hill. REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
4-19
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to {CAUTION:
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
back down the hill as straight as possible in cause your vehicle to roll even if the
REVERSE (R). transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This overrides the transmission. You or someone
way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight else could be injured. If you are going to leave
and maneuver as you back down. It is best that you your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
There are also some things you must not do if you stall, • Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
or are about to stall, when going up a hill: stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle down the hill.
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control. If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. transmission in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled
slowly back straight down. downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL
when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
4-20
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to {CAUTION:
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain Heavy braking when going down a hill can
vehicle control? cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? could cause loss of control and a serious
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? vehicle speed under control.
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? There some things not to do when driving down a hill.
These are important because, if you ignore them,
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to you could lose control and have a serious accident:
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes • When driving downhill, avoid turns that take
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times. steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-21
Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going • A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
uphill. But if it happens when going downhill: too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
Apply the parking brake. distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
engine. incline, the much more narrow track width — the
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, distance between the left and right wheels — may
and drive straight down. not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help. Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
Driving Across an Incline slide or a rollover.
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across • Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
are some things to consider: If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
{CAUTION: incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
seriously injured or killed. If you have any whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-22
When driving across an incline that is not too steep, the
vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide
downhill. If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out
the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk
the course” so you know what the surface is like
before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
clear of the rollover path. be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-23
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your wheels will On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
braking distances. you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do {CAUTION:
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, you and your passengers could drown. Drive
accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
4-24
Driving in Water If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
{CAUTION: as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
Driving through rushing water can be remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle take you longer to stop.
downstream and you and your passengers See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-26 for
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can more information on driving through water.
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the After Off-Road Driving
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
water. underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
demand extreme caution. cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will cooling system for any leakage.
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts. Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
4-25
Driving at Night • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by clean — inside and out.
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by • Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
fatigue. curves.
Night driving tips include: No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
• Drive defensively. as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
• Do not drink and drive. light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
• Slow down and keep more space between you and Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
other vehicles because your headlamps can only and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
light up so much road ahead. drive slower in these types of driving conditions
• Watch for animals. and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
4-26
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION: Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake Other Rainy Weather Tips
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
Flowing or rushing water creates strong include:
forces. Driving through flowing water could • Allow extra following distance.
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants • Pass with caution.
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings • Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
and be very cautious about trying to drive • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
through flowing water.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-63.
4-27
Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
Things to check on your own include: safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows Other driving tips include:
clean — inside and outside? • Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Keep interior temperature cool.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? and to the sides.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-28
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
{CAUTION: that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get lane (stalled car, accident).
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope. See Off-Road Driving on page 4-13 for information
about driving off-road.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
4-29
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-63.
Driving on Snow or Ice

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
road probably have good traction.
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
very careful. can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-30
StabiliTrak® improves your ability to accelerate when If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
driving on a slippery road. But you can turn StabiliTrak®
off if you ever need to. See StabiliTrak® System on If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
page 4-6 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, serious situation. You should probably stay with
or Snow on page 4-33. Even with StabiliTrak®, slow your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
Under certain conditions, you might want to turn some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
StabiliTrak® off, such as when driving through deep and your passengers safe:
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion • Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
at lower speeds.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your you have been stopped by the snow.
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5. body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-31
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-32
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really {CAUTION:
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do speed, they can explode, and you or others
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
help comes.
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
Mud, Ice, or Snow shown on the speedometer.
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your

vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-34. see Tire Chains on page 5-84.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-33
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Recovery Hooks
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low. {CAUTION:
For vehicles with StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control
part of the system off. See StabiliTrak® System on These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
page 4-6. Then shift back and forth between force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. The hooks could break off and you or others
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and could be injured from the chain or cable
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the snapping back.
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. Or, you can use recovery hooks,
if your vehicle has them. If your vehicle does need to
be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-45.
4-34
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the parts on your vehicle can break, and it
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would can change the way your vehicle handles.
not be covered by warranty. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
the life of your vehicle.
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
4-35
Tire and Loading Information Label For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 5-63 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
Label Example
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
With the driver’s door open, you will find the label 4. The resulting figure equals the available
attached below the door lock post (striker). amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
The tire and loading information label shows the For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and pounds. available cargo and luggage load capacity is
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
4-36
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-49 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety Example 1
rules and trailering tips.
Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity
1,000 lbs
A Weight for
(453 kg)
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
B Weight 150 lbs 300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 =
C Available Occupant 700 lbs (317 kg)
and Cargo Weight =
4-37
Example 2 Example 3
Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Vehicle Capacity
1,000 lbs 1,000 lbs
A Weight for A Weight for
(453 kg) (453 kg)
Example 2 = Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
1,000 lbs
B Weight 150 lbs 750 lbs (136 kg) B Weight 200 lbs (453 kg)
(68 kg) × 5 = (91 kg) × 5 =
C Available Cargo 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available Cargo 0 lbs (0 kg)
Weight = Weight =
4-38
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
label for specific information about your vehicle’s on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
capacity weight and seating positions. The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
weight. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
Certification/Tire Label occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains
information about your Front Axle Reserve
Capacity.
4-39
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should The label will help you decide how much cargo
spread it out. and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to
get added durability might not change your weight
{CAUTION: ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than If you put things inside your vehicle — like
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
or either the maximum front or rear Gross else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
parts on your vehicle can break, and it crash, they will keep going.
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause

damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-40
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
{CAUTION: Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are
Things you put inside your vehicle can some things you will need to know:
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash. Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow
• Put things in the cargo area of your plow prep package, adding a plow can damage your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by
evenly. warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry
• Never stack heavier things, like a snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called
some of them are above the tops of RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry
the seats. will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. Your
• Do not leave an unsecured child vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear
restraint in your vehicle. axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) are
exceeded.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can. Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep
• Do not leave a seat folded down package, called RPO VYU. If your vehicle has this
unless you need to. option, you can add a plow to it, provided certain
weights, such as the weights on the vehicle’s axles and
the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Driving on page 4-13.
4-41
The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many • Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
things, such as: recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear
• The options your vehicle came with, and the weight ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and
of those options. rear weight distribution ratio, even though the
actual weight at the front axle may be less than the
• The weight and number of passengers you intend front axle rating.
to carry.
• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist
• The weight of items you have added to your you in determining the amount of rear ballast
vehicle. required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
• The total weight of any additional cargo you intend combination does not exceed the GVW rating,
to carry. the front and rear axle ratings, and the front and
rear weight distribution ratio.
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow.
The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab • The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg). This means that you Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between
may only be able to carry one passenger. But, even this your front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the
may be too much if you have got other equipment already front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and
adding to the weight of your vehicle. passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight you can
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR.
plow on your vehicle: The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be
• Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
does not exceed the axle rating for each. label, as shown.
• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be
installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast
must be properly secured so it will not move during
driving.
4-42
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front

accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding
to the front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
4-43
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front
axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm) {CAUTION:
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft
(305 cm), then: On some vehicles that have certain front
W = 700 lb (318 kg) mounted equipment, such as a snow plow, it
A = 4 ft (122 cm) may be possible to load the front axle to the
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm) front gross axle weight rating (GAWR) but not
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 980 lbs have enough weight on the rear axle to have
(445 kg) proper braking performance. If your brakes can
not work properly, you could have a crash. To
So, if your vehicle’s front axle reserve capacity is more
help your brakes work properly when a snow
than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR. plow is installed, always follow the snow plow
manufacturer or installer’s recommendation for
You can add heavier equipment on the front of the rear ballast to ensure a proper front and rear
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer weight distribution ratio, even though the
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards
actual front weight may be less than the front
the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on
the front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and GAWR, and the total vehicle weight is less
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be than the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
exceeded. Maintaining a proper front and rear weight
distribution ratio is necessary to provide
proper braking performance.
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between

your GVWR and the weight of your vehicle with full
fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can
add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR.
4-44
Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are
intended as a guide when selecting the amount of
Towing
equipment or cargo your vehicle can carry. If you are
unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to Towing Your Vehicle
a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer can also help you with this. Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7.
be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label as shown previously. If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
See your dealer/retailer for additional advice and
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
information about using a snow plow on your vehicle.
Also, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package, The two most common types of recreational vehicle
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
Roof Mounted Lamp on page 3-19 for switch location. towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.
4-45
Here are some important things to consider before you Dinghy Towing
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
recommendations. all four wheels on the ground, the transmission
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have could be damaged. The repairs would not be
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. covered by your warranty. Do not tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? the ground.
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll while being towed.
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-28.
4-46
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-38 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle: being towed is firmly attached to the towing
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P). vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on. 7. Turn the ignition off.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
4-47
Dolly Towing Level Control
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Automatic Level Control
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with The automatic level control rear suspension is available
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission on two-wheel drive and four-wheel drive light-duty
could be damaged. The repairs would not be vehicles and comes as a part of the Autoride®
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle suspension, if equipped.
with the rear wheels on the ground.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive handling under a variety of passenger and loading
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
while being towed. shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly with to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
the front wheels on the ground provided that the activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
wheels are straight. will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
Four-wheel-drive vehicles are not designed to be dolly
the height is being adjusted.
towed. If you need to tow your vehicle, see “Dinghy
Towing” earlier in this section. If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
4-48
Autoride®
If equipped, the Autoride® feature will provide a superior {CAUTION:
vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger
and loading conditions. If you do not use the correct equipment and
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer drive properly, you can lose control when you
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock at all. You and your passengers could be
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to seriously injured. You may also damage your
provide the optimum vehicle ride. vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul switch that, covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
when engaged, will provide additional control of the you have followed all the steps in this section.
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is information about towing a trailer with your
loaded or towing a trailer. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on vehicle.
Towing a Trailer Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage

your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
Hybrid manual for more information. the instructions in this section and check with your
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle dealer/retailer for more information about towing
Break-In on page 2-26 for more information. a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
4-49
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by • Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking, (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, axle or other parts could be damaged.
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly. • Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
these are important for your safety and that of your the heavier loads.
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer. • You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
If you do, here are some important points: conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in
• There are many different laws, including speed limit this section.
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure Three important considerations have to do with weight:
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for • The weight of the trailer
this information can be state or provincial police. • The weight of the trailer tongue
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later • The weight on your vehicle’s tires
in this section.
4-50
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
• Increase the charging system voltage to assist in Press this button at the end of the shift lever to
recharging a battery installed in a trailer. enable/disable the tow/haul mode.
A light on the instrument

panel will illuminate to
indicate that tow/haul
mode has been selected.
4-51
Your vehicle is equipped with a button at the end of the Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
shift lever which, when pressed, enables tow/haul. with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
Your vehicle may be equipped with Autoride® which there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
further improves your vehicle’s ride while towing. vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
See Autoride® on page 4-49 for more information. When may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
the button is pressed, a light on the instrument panel characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul
will illuminate to indicate that Tow/Haul has been is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
selected. Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing the large or heavy load.
button again, at which time the indicator light on
the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will Weight of the Trailer
automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it is started.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
See Weight of the Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
most useful under the following driving conditions:
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
through rolling terrain. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
in busy parking lots where improved low speed equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
control of the vehicle is desired. must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
4-52
C-1500 (2WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR
4800 V8 3.23 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.73 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
3.42 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 7,100 lbs (3 220 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
(Extended Models) 4.10 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6000 V8
4.10 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
(Extended Models)
K-1500 (4WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

5300 V8 3.73 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
4.10 8,200 lbs (3 719 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5300 V8 3.73 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
(Extended Models) 4.10 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6000 V8 4.10 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
(Extended Models)
C-2500 (2WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

6000 V8
3.73 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
(Extended Models)
K-2500 (4WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

6000 V8 3.73 9,300 lbs (4 218 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
(Extended Models)
4-53
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5
Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment, maximum of 1,000 lbs (453 kg) for the 1500 series
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the and up to a maximum of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will 2500 series with a weight distributing hitch.
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for more that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them
right by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-54
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
more than the total of the additional weight. of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
Consider the following example: and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to
weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on
avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
the rear axle will be greater than just the weight
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
4-55
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual Hitches
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
Carrying Hitches
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these
ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35 for more
information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you
apply the weight distribution spring bars.
(A) Body to Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must

be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
4-56
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could be Attach the safety chains to the attaching point on the
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room hitch platform. If you are towing with an aftermarket
when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and hitch, following the trailer or hitch manufacturer’s
the bumper. recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very Trailer Brakes
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls. for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Safety Chains
You should always attach safety chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
4-57
Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
{CAUTION: handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
If you have a rear-most window open and you responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
unconsciousness or death. See Engine brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
Exhaust on page 2-47. To maximize your safety apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
when towing a trailer: the brakes are working. This lets you check your
• Have your exhaust system inspected for electrical connection at the same time.
leaks, and make necessary repairs before During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
starting on your trip. load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
• Keep the rear-most windows closed. brakes are still working.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
Following Distance
opening, drive with your front, main Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
heating or cooling system on and with the you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, This can help you avoid situations that require
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use heavy braking and sudden turns.
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
on page 3-23.
4-58
Passing Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Backing Up When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument

panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, bulbs are still working.
have someone guide you.
Driving On Grades
Making Turns
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid they would get hot and no longer work well.
making very sharp turns while trailering. You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
4-59
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the Parking on Hills
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier in this section for more information.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant at higher altitudes
{CAUTION:
will boil at a lower temperature than at or near sea
level. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing You really should not park your vehicle, with a
at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid wrong, your rig could start to move. People
this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
level ground) with the automatic transmission in trailer can be damaged.
PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-31. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
4-60
When You Are Ready to Leave After
{CAUTION: Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle while you:
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with • start your engine,
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle
can roll.
• shift into a gear, and
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
• release the parking brake.
can move suddenly. You or others could be 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
the steps that follow. chocks.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Maintenance When Trailer Towing
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive vehicles Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and
NEUTRAL. brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-61
Trailer Wiring Harness Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
Package
harnesses for towing a trailer.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your dealer/retailer.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
circuits: towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
• Brown: Taillamps circuits:
• White: Ground • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Red: Battery Feed* • Brown: Taillamps
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* • White: Ground
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the • Light Green: Back-up Lamps
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your
• Red: Battery Feed*
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
4-62
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the Power Winches
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press
the tow/haul mode button located at the end of the shift Trailer Recommendations
lever. This will boost the vehicle system voltage and
properly charge the battery. If the trailer is too light for You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
tow/haul mode, you can turn on the headlamps as a Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. CWR is the
second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It
battery. doesn’t include the weight of the people inside. But you
can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total
Electric Brake Control Wiring cargo load must not be more than your vehicle’s CWR.
Provisions Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions spring bars in place.
are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
following wires: correct hitch and trailer brakes.
• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-49.
• Red/Black: Battery
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a
qualified service center.
4-63
✍ NOTES
4-64
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-31
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Engine Overheating .......................................5-31
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3 Overheated Engine Protection
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Operating Mode ........................................5-33
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Cooling System ............................................5-34
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-39
Vehicle ......................................................5-5 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-39
Fuel ................................................................5-5 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-40
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Brakes ........................................................5-42
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5 Battery ........................................................5-45
California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Jump Starting ...............................................5-46
Additives .......................................................5-6 Rear Axle .......................................................5-51
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................5-7 Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-52
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-8 Front Axle ......................................................5-53
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-9
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-55
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-11
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-58
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-12
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-58
Hood Release ..............................................5-12
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-14
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-58
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-60
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-60
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-61
(4-Speed Transmission) ..............................5-22 Tires ..............................................................5-63
Automatic Transmission Fluid Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-64
(6-Speed Transmission) ..............................5-24 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-67
Engine Coolant .............................................5-28 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-70
5-1
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-71 Weatherstrips .............................................5-109
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-73 Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-110
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-75 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-110
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-77 Finish Care ................................................5-110
Buying New Tires .........................................5-78 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-111
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-80 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-80 and Trim ................................................5-112
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-82 Tires .........................................................5-113
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-82 Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-113
Tire Chains ..................................................5-84 Finish Damage ...........................................5-113
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-85 Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-113
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-86 Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-114
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-87 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-114
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Vehicle Identification .....................................5-115
Spare Tire ................................................5-92 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-115
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-98 Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-116
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...........5-102 Electrical System ..........................................5-116
Spare Tire .................................................5-106 Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-116
Appearance Care ..........................................5-106 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-117
Interior Cleaning .........................................5-106 Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-117
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-108 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-117
Leather ......................................................5-108 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-118
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-119
Plastic Surfaces .......................................5-109 Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-120
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-109 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-124
5-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
supported service people. and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-91.
California Proposition 65 Warning

Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries experience, the proper replacement parts,
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may and tools before you attempt any vehicle
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling maintenance task.
may be necessary. For additional information, see • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
Doing Your Own Service Work use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
{CAUTION: manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
damaged if you try to do service work on a do your own service work, see Servicing Your
vehicle without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-90.
CAUTION: (Continued) You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of Gasoline Specifications
the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline specification D 4814 in the United States or
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
shows the code letter or number that identifies your We recommend against the use of gasolines
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number additional information.
(VIN) on page 5-115.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0) or
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), you can use either
regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up
to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
on page 5-7. In all other engines, use only regular
unleaded gasoline.
5-5
California Fuel that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions prevent most deposit-related problems.
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
California specifications. See the underhood emission ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting in your area. We recommend that you use these
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
emission control system performance might be affected. containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-48. If this occurs, return to your Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
repairs might not be covered by your warranty. system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Additives
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
are now required to contain additives that help prevent called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
the emission control system to work properly. In most whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental emission control system could be affected. The
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences return to your dealer/retailer for service.
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
5-6
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E85) pump available. The U. S. Department of
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Energy has an alternative fuels website
shows the code letter or number that identifies your (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
(VIN) on page 5-115. content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or the
5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), you can use either regular At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
ethanol (E85); also see Fuel on page 5-5. In all other will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
under Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. ASTM specifications can affect drivability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or
the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3) can use 85% ethanol
fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that
are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
5-7
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
must be formulated properly for your climate according E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuel system.
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not additives would not be covered by your new vehicle
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens, warranty.
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you That damage would not be covered under your
add as much fuel as possible — do not add less than warranty.
three gallons (11 L) when refueling. You should drive the
vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven Fuels in Foreign Countries
miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
Tank on page 5-9. be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-8
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the vehicles is
equipped with E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap with the
words “E85/gasoline” will appear.
5-9
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the

tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
inboard and release. The door will pop open. painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
soon, it will spring back to the right. before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
hook on the fuel door. fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-48
5-10
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), Filling a Portable Fuel Container
the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the
fuel cap is not properly installed.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
shutting off the pump or by notifying the You can be badly burned and your vehicle
station attendant. Leave the area immediately. damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get containers.
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for • Do not fill a container while it is inside a
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to on any surface other than the ground.
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
on page 3-48. inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-11
Checking Things Under Hood Release
the Hood To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
{CAUTION: located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
An electric fan under the hood can start up of the steering wheel.
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open
to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of the
hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the

secondary hood release, near the center of
the grille.
5-13
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.8L and 6.0L similar), here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. under Brakes on page 5-42.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See M. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. on page 5-120.
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
System on page 5-34 and Coolant Surge Tank Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
Pressure Cap on page 5-31. on page 5-40.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-46. Engine Oil
E. Battery. See Battery on page 5-45.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” Checking Engine Oil
under Engine Oil on page 5-15. It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
(4-Speed Transmission) on page 5-22 or Automatic
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) on
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
page 5-24.
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 5-46. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
J. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
page 5-34. again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-39.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of

the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-124. way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has

so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and

use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Look for three things: Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
• GM6094M oil can result in engine damage not covered by
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting your warranty.
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
• SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best cold starting and better protection for the engine at
for your vehicle. extremely low temperatures.
5-17
Engine Oil Additives people who will perform this work using genuine parts
and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended regularly and keep it at the proper level.
oils with the starburst symbol that meet
GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
performance and engine protection. change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
When to Change Engine Oil System
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
which an oil change will be indicated can vary where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you OIL SOON message coming on, reset the system.
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
When the system has calculated that oil life has been change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is Life System:
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
page 3-65. Change the oil as soon as possible within the If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might display. See DIC Operation and Displays
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-56 or DIC Operation
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-62.
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
5-18
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC, Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
or the trip odometer reset stem if your vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds. See Engine Compartment
The oil life will change to 100%. Overview on page 5-14 for
the location of the engine
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes air cleaner/filter and the air
back on when you start your vehicle, the Engine Oil Life filter restriction indicator, if
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure. the vehicle has one.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags When to Inspect the Engine Air
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Cleaner/Filter
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator, it lets
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the you know when the engine air cleaner/filter needs to be
replaced. On vehicles with a restriction indicator, you
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into change and replace the engine air cleaner/filter when the
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking indicator tells you to.
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
a service station, or a local recycling center for help.
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
5-19
How to Inspect the Engine Air Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction 1. Locate the air
Indicator cleaner/filter assembly.
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air See Engine
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or is Compartment Overview
in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and on page 5-14.
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace the
engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter restriction
indicator.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When you have the engine air cleaner/filter
removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. 2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, and lift up the cover.
a new filter is required.
5-20
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the

housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if the vehicle
has one, by pressing the top button on the indicator.
5-21
Automatic Transmission Fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
(4-Speed Transmission) • When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
When to Check and Change Automatic • At high speed for quite a while.
Transmission Fluid • In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid • While pulling a trailer.
level is when the engine oil is changed. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure (82°C to 93°C).
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
How to Check Automatic Transmission (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves
Fluid and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
department. but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage level be low during this cold check, you must check the
your transmission. Too much can mean that some fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
5-22
Checking the Fluid Level See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
more information on location.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
running. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever then pull it back out again.
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick

handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of the
engine compartment, on 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
the passenger’s side of the level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
vehicle. below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
Consistency of Readings Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
procedure described previously. Consistency the automatic transmission fluid listed in
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer/retailer. • After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described
under “How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid,”
How to Add Automatic Transmission earlier in this section.
Fluid • When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
to lock the dipstick in place.
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
Automatic Transmission Fluid
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it (6-Speed Transmission)
is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to When to Check and Change Automatic
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Transmission Fluid
Do not overfill. It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If you
suspect a small leak, then use the following checking
procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a
large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle
towed to a dealer/retailer service department and have it
repaired before driving the vehicle further.
5-24
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission Before checking the fluid level, prepare your vehicle as
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages follows:
may not be covered by your warranty. Always 1. Start the engine and park your vehicle on a level
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in surface. Keep the engine running.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in PARK (P).
the Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the
shift lever back to PARK (P).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
Fluid one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage 5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
your transmission. Too much can mean that some button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Driver Information Center (DIC).
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you 6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
check your transmission fluid. perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
5-25
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated
safely until a hot check procedure can be made.
The hot check procedure is the most accurate method
to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure
at the first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure
to check fluid level when the transmission temperature is
between 80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the
engine compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle. 5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
The dipstick handle has add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the
this graphic. See Engine level into the COLD band. It does not take much
Compartment Overview on fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not
page 5-14 for more overfill.
information.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after
the transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 160°F to 200°F
(71°C to 93°C).
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way, down to lock the dipstick in place.
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify
the reading.
5-26
Hot Check Procedure 4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level reading.
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the
first opportunity in order to verify the cold check.
The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it
is important to ensure the transmission temperature
is within range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of the
engine compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine 5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
Compartment Overview on band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within
page 5-14 for more the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is
information. between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add
or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
(0.5L). Do not overfill.
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-27
Consistency of Readings A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedures described. Consistency (repeatable • Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutes or longer to
obtain an accurate reading because of residual fluid • Protect against rust and corrosion.
draining down the dipstick tube. If inconsistent readings • Help keep the proper engine temperature.
persist, check the transmission breather to be sure it is
clean and not clogged. If readings are still inconsistent, • Let the warning lights and gages work as they
contact your dealer/retailer. should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
Engine Coolant cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant. DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-31.
5-28
What to Use Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and The repair cost would not be covered by your
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
not need to add anything else. other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
Adding only plain water to your cooling system damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-29
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your

engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine FULL COLD mark.
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
for more information on location.
5-30
Adding Coolant Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL® If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the Hybrid manual for more information.
engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
{CAUTION: occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
information on location.
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Engine Overheating
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated. There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-47.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-65.
5-31
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
{CAUTION: Protection Operating Mode on page 5-33 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
Steam from an overheated engine can burn emergency.
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone Engine
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
until there is no sign of steam or coolant before ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
you open the hood. with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is problem.
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
or others could be badly burned. Stop your no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
until the engine is cool. • Climb a long hill on a hot day.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating • Stop after high-speed driving.
Mode on page 5-33 for information on driving to • Idle for long periods in traffic.
a safe place in an emergency.
• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-49.
5-32
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
1. If the vehicle has an air conditioner and it is on, later in this section.
turn it off. You might decide not to lift the hood but to get service
2. Turn on the heater to the highest temperature and help right away.
at the highest fan speed and open the windows as
necessary. Overheated Engine Protection
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N) Operating Mode
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the If an overheated engine condition exists and the
engine idle. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
normally. performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle
to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
vehicle immediately. overheat protection mode should be avoided.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
engine-driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal allow the engine to cool before attempting any
idle speed for at least five minutes while parked. repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle has an Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
electric cooling fan, idle the engine for five minutes reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
while parked.
5-33
Cooling System
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode {CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what An electric fan under the hood can start up
you will see: and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do

not do anything else until it cools down. If possible, the
vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Check the
coolant level after the system cools down. Some amount
of coolant may be lost due to overheating.
5.3L Engine (4.8L and 6.0L Similar)
A. Coolant Surge Tank

B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
5-34
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, page 5-33 for information on driving to a safe place
radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the in an emergency.
cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
5-35
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank the pressure cap.
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-28 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows: {CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
{CAUTION: can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
system can blow out and burn you badly. They coolant warning system is set for the proper
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
can come out at high speed. Never turn the would not get the overheat warning. The
CAUTION: (Continued) engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-36
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack 1. You can remove the
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. coolant surge tank
Use the recommended coolant and the proper pressure cap when the
coolant mixture. cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
{CAUTION: cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and

remove it.
5-37
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
to the FULL COLD mark. the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure steps 1 through 6.
5-38
Engine Fan Noise Power Steering Fluid
If your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide Hybrid manual for more information.
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is See Engine Compartment
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and Overview on page 5-14 for
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer reservoir location.
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages. When to Check Power Steering Fluid
If your vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
outside temperatures, or if you are operating your air indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
conditioning system, the fans may change to high speed repaired.
and you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal
and indicates that the cooling system is functioning
properly. The fans will change to low speed when
additional cooling is no longer required.
5-39
How to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following: To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
cool down. Always use the proper fluid.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
clean rag. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on Windshield Washer Fluid
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. What to Use
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
level up to the mark. sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing
in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing.
5-40
Adding Washer Fluid Notice:
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of water.
each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to add Water can cause the solution to freeze and
washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir. damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
Open the cap with the clean as well as washer fluid.
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
tank is full. See Engine when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
Compartment Overview on expansion if freezing occurs, which could
page 5-14 for reservoir damage the tank if it is completely full.
location. • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-41
Brakes It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
Brake Fluid the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
The brake master cylinder
hydraulic system.
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 {CAUTION:
for the location of the
reservoir. If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
in this section.
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you Light on page 3-45.
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since
a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
work well. to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-42
Checking Brake Fluid Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the dirt from entering the reservoir.
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be

above MIN. If it is not,
{CAUTION:
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to see if With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
there is a leak. hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
MAX mark. have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
What to Add • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Your Vehicle on page 5-110.
on page 6-13.
5-43
Brake Wear Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning the brakes.
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
on the brake pedal firmly. brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-124.
{CAUTION: Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that Brake Pedal Travel
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
wear warning sound, have your vehicle pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
serviced. might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair. Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-44
Replacing Brake System Parts Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many chemicals known to the State of California to cause
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle handling.
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for Vehicle Storage
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not {CAUTION:
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
worse. The braking performance you have come to that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts are not careful. See Jump Starting on
in the wrong replacement brake parts. page 5-46 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Battery
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
Hybrid manual for more information. remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
that has the replacement number shown on the original remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain the
page 5-14 for battery location. charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
5-45
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode by your warranty.
Hybrid manual for more information. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following battery with a negative ground system.
steps to do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
{CAUTION: be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
because: each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
• They contain acid that can burn you. connection you do not want. You would not be able
• They contain gas that can explode or to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
ignite. damage the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
burn you. the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
all of these things can hurt you. transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.
5-46
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This
avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery. on the right front of the engine, where the
negative battery cable attaches.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal,
it is located under a red plastic cover at the positive See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+) for more information on the location of the remote
terminal, open the red plastic cover. positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals.
5-47
{CAUTION:
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
An electric fan can start up even when the
not need to add water to the battery installed
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
hands, clothing and tools away from any
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
underhood electric fan.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
{CAUTION: Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-48
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, Do not let the other end touch anything until the
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
will get a short that would damage the battery negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the battery.
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
6. Connect the red the dead battery.
positive (+) cable to the 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
positive (+) terminal the engine for a while.
of the vehicle with the
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
dead battery. Use
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
a remote positive (+)
service.
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
5-49
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may the following:
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect vehicle that had the bad battery.
and remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each other 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
or other metal. vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the
vehicle has one, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote

Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-50
Rear Axle How to Check Lubricant
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the
fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid
has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained
back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken five 1500 Series
minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to
have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been
stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear
axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading.
5-51
• For all 6.0L 1500 Series applications, the
proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches
(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough
fluid to reach the proper level.
• The proper fill level for the 2500 Series is from
0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of
the filler plug hole, located at the front of the axle.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
2500 Series lubrication.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a Transfer Case

level surface. When to Check Lubricant
• For all 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Series applications, the It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
(1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only Have it inspected and repaired.
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
5-52
How to Check Lubricant When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
Automatic Transfer Case unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug
hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
5-53
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
2500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
1500 Series
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add some
A: Fill Plug lubricant:
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-54
What to Use The vehicle should:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what • Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids a light colored wall.
and Lubricants on page 6-13. • Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
Headlamp Aiming • Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming • Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment • Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
can be necessary. person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this • Have tires properly inflated.
can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs • Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
to be adjusted. vehicle.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
5-55
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-12
4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to

the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
headlamp. piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to
on the low-beam headlamp. be seen on the flat surface.
5-56
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
incorrect headlamp aim.
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
Torx® socket. headlamp.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-57
Bulb Replacement Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see and Back-up Lamps
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-60.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this Hybrid manual for more information.
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
A. Taillamp/Stoplamp
Halogen Bulbs B. Back-up Lamp
C. Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-58
To replace one of these bulbs: 4. Press the release tab, if bulb socket has one, and
turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on page 2-15 from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
2. Remove the
two screws from 6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert
the taillamp it into the taillamp assembly. Turn the bulb socket
assembly. clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling,
make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp
assembly with the vehicle. If this is not done the
taillamp assembly cannot be correctly installed.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until the inner

pins on the taillamp assembly are disengaged from
the vehicle.
5-59
License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

License Plate Lamp 168
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp,
and Stoplamp 3047
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate. dealer/retailer.
2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the molding opening.
5-60
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 6-15.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the

blade, and turn the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
5-61
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park
rest position.
4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest
position.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the

backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should be used
when pulling it away from the vehicle.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the
wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push
the blade away from the wiper arm.
5-62
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever • Overinflated tires are more likely to
have questions about your tire warranty and where be cut, punctured, or broken by a
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty sudden impact — such as when you
booklet for details. hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
{CAUTION: If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
Poorly maintained and improperly used damaged, replace them.
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too 20-Inch Tires
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35. P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as
• Underinflated tires pose the same touring tires and are designed for on road use.
danger as overloaded tires. The The low-profile, wide tread design is not
resulting accident could cause serious recommended for off-road driving. See Off-Road
injury. Check all tires frequently to Driving on page 4-13, for additional information.
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.
5-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
Useful information about a tire is molded into the to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
of letters and numbers used to define a particular three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, temperature resistance. For more information,
and service description. See the “Tire Size” see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-64
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
Maximum load that can be carried and the of letters and numbers used to define a particular
maximum pressure needed to support that load. tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
For information on recommended tire pressure see and service description. See the “Tire Size”
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading illustration later in this section for more detail.
Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-65
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): Tire Size
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the The following examples show the different parts of
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle a tire size.
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States

version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter
P as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-66
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United Tire Terminology and Definitions
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
means a light truck tire engineered to standards set pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall Accessory Weight: This means the combined
to sidewall. weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that power steering, power brakes, power windows,
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. power seats, and air conditioning.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is to its width.
75 percent as high as it is wide. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to located between the plies and the tread. Cords
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. may be made from steel or other reinforcing
The letter R means radial ply construction; the materials.
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
inches. are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279. in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
Speed ratings range from A to Z. or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-70.
5-67
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
standard and optional equipment including the 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but capacity of a tire.
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the for that tire.
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
of production. curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. weight, and production options weight.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
page 4-35. on page 4-35.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35. positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
when mounted on a vehicle. faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
vehicles. the tire.
5-68
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
multipurpose vehicles. tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-77.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Standards): A tire information system that
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
Your Vehicle on page 4-35. temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the determined by tire manufacturers using government
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-80.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
and the bead. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
tire can operate. weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
road surface. The amount of grip provided. a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into and the original equipment tire size and
contact with the road. recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading Your
5-69
Inflation - Tire Pressure A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
to operate effectively. amount of air pressure needed to support your
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is For additional information regarding how much
not. If your tires do not have enough air weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
(under-inflation), you can get the following: the Tire and Loading Information label, see
• Too much flexing Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35. How you load
• Too much heat your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
• Tire overloading than it was designed to carry.
• Premature or irregular wear When to Check
• Poor handling
Check your tires once a month or more.
• Reduced fuel economy
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), tire. See Spare Tire on page 5-106 for additional
you can get the following: information.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-70
How to Check Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
look properly inflated even when they are vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure receiver located in the vehicle.
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
inflation pressure matches the recommended label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information pressure for those tires.)
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
recommended amount. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
and moisture. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5-71
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper Federal Communications Commission
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has (FCC) and Industry and Science
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Canada
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is two conditions:
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
for approximately one minute and then remain 2. This device must accept any interference received,
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue including interference that may cause undesired
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the operation.
malfunction exists.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur the following two conditions:
for a variety of reasons, including the installation 1. This device may not cause interference.
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always 2. This device must accept any interference received,
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one including interference that may cause undesired
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the operation of the device.
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the Changes or modifications to this system by other than
TPMS to continue to function properly. an authorized service facility could void authorization to
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73, for use this equipment.
additional information.
5-72
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
Hybrid manual for more information. Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-56 or DIC
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition page 3-62 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and page 3-65.
wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
to a receiver located in the vehicle. that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
TPMS illuminates the low vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tire pressure warning light equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
located on the instrument vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
panel cluster. Vehicle on page 4-35, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-75 and Tires on page 5-63.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors.
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. not covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid
tire sealants.
5-73
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the and wheels other than those recommended for your
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-78.
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
come on are: a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC TPMS Sensor Matching Process
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor. Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will
not completed or not completed successfully after need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front
sensor matching process is performed successfully. tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer
section. for service.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not
sensors are installed and the sensor matching exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
process is performed successfully. See your tire’s sidewall.
5-74
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the 6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure the procedure in Step 5.
gage, or a key. 7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel the procedure in Step 5.
position, and five minutes overall to match all four 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five indicate the sensor identification code has been
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
matching process stops and you need to start over. sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below: The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
1. Set the parking brake.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off. 10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
Information label.
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the Tire Inspection and Rotation
DIC screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem. wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or Tires on page 5-77 for more information.
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound, (8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
confirms that the sensor identification code has on page 6-4.
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
5-75
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform Tire and Loading Information label. See Inflation -
most like it did when the tires were new. Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading Your
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your Vehicle on page 4-35.
tires as soon as possible and check wheel Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-77 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-82. tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-124.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but
correct rotation pattern shown here. be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86.
5-76
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, You need new tires if any of the following statements
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it are true:
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or • You can see the indicators at three or more places
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102. around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
When It Is Time for New Tires tire’s rubber.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions, deep enough to show cord or fabric.
influence when you need new tires.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
One way to tell when it is • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
time for new tires is to cannot be repaired well because of the size or
check the treadwear location of the damage.
indicators, which appear
when your tires have The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
less of tread remaining. your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
Some commercial truck this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
tires may not have conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
treadwear indicators. proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-77
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your {CAUTION:
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same
the vehicle might not handle properly, and you
TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to
have tires that are designed to give the same could have a crash. Using tires of different
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as sizes, brands, or types could also cause
the original tires. damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
same size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall Your vehicle may have a different size spare
performance of your vehicle, including brake system than the road tires (those originally installed on
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire your vehicle). When new, your vehicle included
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire overall diameter as your vehicle’s road tires and
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the
wheels, so it is all right to drive on it. Because
TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-64 for this spare was developed for use on your
additional information. vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-75 for
information on proper tire rotation.
5-78
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
{CAUTION: spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, higher or lower than the proper warning level you would
the wheel rim flanges could develop get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire System on page 5-71.
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading Your
wheels on your vehicle. Vehicle on page 4-35, for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information Label and its location on
your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are
the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
5-79
Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than Quality grades can be found where applicable on
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its maximum section width. For example:
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover The following information relates to the system
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control, developed by the United States National Highway
the performance of these systems can be affected. Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
{CAUTION: vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
may not provide an acceptable level of snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
performance and safety if tires not spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
recommended for those wheels are selected. 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
You may increase the chance that you will limited-production tires.
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
While the tires available on General Motors
specific wheel and tire systems developed for passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
your vehicle, and have them properly installed respect to these grades, they must also conform
by a GM certified technician. to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-78 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-80
Treadwear Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
under controlled conditions on a specified generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
government test course. For example, a tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
as well on the government course as a tire high temperature can cause the material of the tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
depends upon the actual conditions of their use, temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
however, and may depart significantly from the grade C corresponds to a level of performance
norm due to variations in driving habits, service which all passenger car tires must meet under the
practices, and differences in road characteristics Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
and climate. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
Traction – AA, A, B, C minimum required by law.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s is established for a tire that is properly inflated
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under controlled conditions on specified underinflation, or excessive loading, either
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. separately or in combination, can cause heat
A tire marked C may have poor traction buildup and possible tire failure.
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-81
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
longest tire life and best overall performance.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one
side or the other, the alignment might need to be Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
5-82
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
{CAUTION:
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
air and make you lose control. You could have a used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
collision in which you or others could be suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel replace a wheel, use a new GM original
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems

with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more
information.
5-83
Tire Chains
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
{CAUTION: contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels.
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20 If you do find traction devices that will fit,
size tires, do not use tire chains. They can install them on the rear tires.
damage your vehicle because there is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
Notice: If your vehicle has P265/70R17 size tires,
vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the vehicle’s tires. Install them on the rear tires only.
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
Do not use chains on the front tires.
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
manufacturer recommends it for use on your chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
vehicle and tire size combination and road them. If the contact continues, slow down until
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
instructions. chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-84
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, {CAUTION:
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls The jack provided with your vehicle is
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. used for anything else, you or others could be
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-85
Changing a Flat Tire
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage be sure the transfer case is in a drive
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information. 4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
{CAUTION: vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle of the tire farthest away from the one
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you being changed. That would be the tire on
or other people. You and they could be badly the other side, at the opposite end of the
injured or even killed. Find a level place to vehicle.
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
5-86
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use this as a guide to Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is
stored under the storage tray, which is located on the
driver side trim panel (over the rear wheelhouse).
Regular Wheelbase shown,

Extended Wheelbase similar.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up

on the finger depression under the jack symbol.
5-87
2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool bag The tools you will be using include the following:
by turning it counterclockwise.
A. Jack D. Jack Handle
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise to B. Wheel Blocks Extensions
release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket. C. Jack Handle E. Wheel Wrench
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.
5-88
To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics G. Tire/Wheel Retainer J. Hoist End of
and instructions: H. Spare Tire (Valve Extension Tool
Stem Pointed Down) K. Spare Tire Lock
I. Hoist Shaft Access
Hole
1. Open the hoist shaft access door (C) on the
bumper to access the spare tire lock (K).
2. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
key, turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out.
A. Hoist Assembly D. Jack Handle

B. Hoist Shaft Extensions
C. Hoist Shaft Access E. Wheel Wrench 3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and
Cover/Hole F. Hoist Cable wheel wrench (E) as shown.
5-89
4. Insert the open end of 6. Use the wheel wrench
the extension (J) hook that allows you to
through the hole in pull the hoist cable
the rear bumper (I) towards you, to assist
(hoist shaft in reaching the
access hole). spare tire.
Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D)

connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed square
end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
5. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to

lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-98
5-90
Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin,
tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of
the wheel along with the cable and latch.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in
the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer.
Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding
the retainer up the pin while pressing down on
the latch.
5-91
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more information.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.

Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
2. If your vehicle has a center cap place the chisel

end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the cap out.
If the wheel has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the
plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be
retained in the hub cap after it is removed from
the wheel.
5-92
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position Front Position
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and
only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack
handle to the jack (A). Position the jack on the
frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections
overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise
the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to
clear the ground.
5-93
Rear Position – 1500 Models Rear Position – All Other Models
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the

vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B)
and both jack handle extensions (C). Attach the
wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle extensions (C).
Attach the jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the
jacking pad provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
5-94
5. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
{CAUTION:
6. Take off the flat tire.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-95
7. Remove any rust or dirt 8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
from the wheel bolts, of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
mounting surfaces, and spare tire.
spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the

wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
{CAUTION: is held against the hub.
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could come 11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86.
5-96
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-124 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall either the center cap or the bolt-on hub
cap, depending on which your vehicle has.
• For center caps, line up the tab on the center cap
with the slot in the wheel. The cap only goes in one
way. Place the cap on the wheel and press until it
{CAUTION: snaps into place.
• For bolt-on hub caps, line up the plastic nut caps with
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts the wheel nuts and tighten clockwise by hand to get
them started. Then tighten with the wheel wrench
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
until snug.
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-124 for wheel nut
torque specification.
5-97
Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist 1. Check under the

assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. vehicle to see if the
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling cable end is visible.
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the If the cable is not
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing visible proceed
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools to Step 6.
on page 5-102.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly 2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
and you and others could get hurt. Read and the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
follow the instructions listed next. clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
5-98
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench 6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
counterclockwise three or four turns. the backs facing each other.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the 7. Place the bottom edge
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with of the jack (A) on the
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on wheel blocks (B),
page 5-87. separating them so that
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench the jack is balanced
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches securely.
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
5-99
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel 9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel center of the spare tire.
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the 10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
rear bumper. lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place.
The secondary latch has released and the spare
tire is balancing on the jack.
5-100
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or 14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
on either side of you as you pull the jack out it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
from under the spare. under the vehicle.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to cable is hanging under the vehicle.
push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
out from under the spare tire with the other hand. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-92.
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
5-101
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the
spare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics and
and Tools instructions to help you:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire

under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as
soon as possible.
A. Hoist Assembly D. Jack Handle
B. Hoist Shaft Extensions
C. Hoist Shaft Access E. Wheel Wrench
Cover/Hole F. Hoist Cable
5-102
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire J. Hoist End of
(Valve Stem Extension Tool
Pointed Down) K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and

wheel wrench (E) as shown.
4. Insert the open end of
the extension (J)
through the hole in
the rear bumper (I)
(hoist shaft
access hole).
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the
tire/wheel retainer (D) from the guide pin. Pull
the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt the
retainer down through the center wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
5-103
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the To store the tools, do the following.
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
A. Wheel Blocks E. Jack

B. Tool Bag with F. Wing Nut Retaining
Jack Tools Wheel Blocks
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), C. Retaining Bracket G. Wing Nut on Jack
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, D. Wing Nut Retaining
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Tool Bag
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover.
5-104
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and
jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B).
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together
with the wing nut (F).
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the
driver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse.
4. Turn the wing nut (G) clockwise until the jack is
secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to
position the holes in the base of the jack onto the
pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool
bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.
6. Return the storage tray to its original stored

position.
5-105
Spare Tire After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire. is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
on page 5-70 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-35 available in case you need it again.
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-92 and Storing a Flat match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102. size and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on your vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have
Appearance Care
your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could
damage your vehicle, and the repair costs would not Interior Cleaning
be covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel
drive when the different size spare tire is installed on Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
your vehicle. cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
the road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it is your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
and the different size spare tire is installed, keep the be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
vehicle in two-wheel drive. may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
5-106
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior. odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. or techniques:
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on • Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
remove a soil from any interior surface.
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, • Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning • Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window damage your interior and does not improve the
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your effectiveness of soil removal.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. • Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening your • Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
vehicle’s doors and windows.
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs • Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from the
using a small brush with soft bristles.
use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-107
Fabric/Carpet If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, may result, clean the entire surface.
always try to remove them first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
as possible using one of the following techniques: towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed. Leather
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
then vacuum. remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
To clean, use the following instructions: used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
club soda. lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub appearance and feel of your leather and are not
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
cleaning cloth remains clean. appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-108
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Care of Safety Belts
Plastic Surfaces Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution {CAUTION:
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may they might not be able to provide adequate
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic soap and lukewarm water.
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
difficult to see through the windshield under certain silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
conditions. damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
5-109
Washing Your Vehicle High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
it clean by washing it often. power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it would washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
not be covered by the warranty. Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car on page 5-110.
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as Finish Care
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
Materials on page 5-114. Follow all manufacturers’ paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any Materials on page 5-114.
vehicle care product. If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
5-110
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive Windshield, Backglass, and
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and Wiper Blades
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle. Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a Wipers can be damaged by:
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish • Extreme dusty conditions
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible. • Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam
or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright
metal parts.
5-111
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
and Trim chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or them because you could damage the surface. Do not
chrome-plated wheels. use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
be applied.
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
driving on roads that have been sprayed with immediately after application.
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
with soap and water after exposure. cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
wheels, you could damage the surface of the carbide tire cleaning brushes.
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
5-112
Tires Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
products on your vehicle may damage the paint expense.
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
surfaces on your vehicle. materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal Underbody Maintenance
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
replaced to restore corrosion protection. control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
5-113
Chemical Paint Spotting Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and Description Usage
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, polishing cloth.
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the Tar and Road Removes tar, road oil, and
paint surface. Oil Remover asphalt.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of and Polish stainless steel.
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within Removes soil and black
White Sidewall
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls and
whichever occurs first. raised white lettering.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
Finish Enhancer fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
5-114
Description Usage Vehicle Identification
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
surface contamination. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine protects tires. No wiping
Low Gloss
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
phosphate free.
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
Quickly removes spots the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
Spot Lifter and stains from carpets, windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery. appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels
and the certificates of title and registration.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics, Engine Identification
vinyl, leather and carpet.
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-124 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
5-115
Service Parts Identification Label Electrical System
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has the Add-On Electrical Equipment
following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Hybrid manual for more information.
• Model designation Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
• Paint information vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
• Production options and special equipment vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
Do not remove this label from the vehicle. your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-90.
5-116
Windshield Wiper Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
Power Windows and Other Power replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Options
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, the amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down that you can get along without – like the radio or
period, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
goes away. amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-117
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses Usage
The instrument panel fuse block access door is located 7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting
on the driver side edge of the instrument panel. 8 Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
Passenger Door Module, Universal
9 Home Remote System
10 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
11 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
12
Stoplamp
13 Rear Climate Controls
14 Not Used
15 Body Control Module (BCM)
16 Accessory Power Outlets
17 Interior Lamps
18 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
19 Rear Seat Entertainment
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
20 Power Liftgate
Fuses Usage
1 Rear Seats 21 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
2 rear Accessory Power Outlet 22 Driver Information Center (DIC)
3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight 23 Rear Wiper
4 Driver Door Module 24 Not Used
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn 25 Driver Seat Module, Remote
5 Signal Keyless Entry System
6 Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 26 Not Used
5-118
Harness Usage Harness Usage
Connector Connector
LT DR Driver Door Harness Connection BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2
BODY Harness Connector BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1
BODY Harness Connector BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
SEO/UPFITTER HarnessEquipment
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the Special Option Upfitter
Connector
steering column.
Top View Circuit Breaker Usage
CB1 Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB2 Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
CB3 Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
CB4 Rear Sliding Window
5-119
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine

compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the
cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Fuses Usage
1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
Electronic Stability Suspension
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the 2 Control, Automatic Level Control
covers on any electrical component. Exhaust
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your 3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
thumb and index finger and pull straight out. 4 Engine Controls
Engine Control Module, Throttle
5 Control
5-120
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
6 Trailer Brake Controller 15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps
7 Front Washer 16 Passenger Side Low-Beam
8 Oxygen Sensors Headlamp
9 Antilock Brakes System 2 17 Air Conditioning Compressor
10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 18 Oxygen Sensors
11 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition)
12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 20 Fuel Pump
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils 21 Fuel System Control Module
13 (Right Side) 22 Headlamp Washer
14 Transmission Control Module 23 Rear Windshield Washer
(Battery) Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
24
(Left Side)
25 Trailer Park Lamps
26 Driver Side Park Lamps
27 Passenger Side Park Lamps
28 Fog Lamps
5-121
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
29 Horn 44 Liftgate Release
30 Passenger Side High-Beam 45 Airbag System (Battery)
Headlamp 46 Instrument Panel Cluster
31 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 47 Power Take-Off
32 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),
48
33 Daytime Running Lamps 2 Compass-Temperature Mirror
34 Sunroof 49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent (CHMSL)
35 System 50 Rear Defogger
36 Windshield Wiper 51 Heated Mirrors
37 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
38 Electric Adjustable Pedals 53 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
39 Climate Controls (Battery) Outlet
40 Airbag System (Ignition) 54 Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
41 Amplifier
55 Climate Controls (Ignition)
42 Audio System
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise 56 Fuel Pump (Ignition)
43 Control
5-122
J-Case Fuses Usage Relays Usage
60 Cooling Fan 1 FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed
61 Antilock Brake System 1 FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed
62 Starter ENG EXH VLV Not Used
63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control
64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp
65 Electric Running Boards FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
66 Heated Windshield Washer System A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor
67 Four-Wheel Drive System STRTR Starter
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery PWR/TRN Powertrain
68 Power) FUEL PMP Fuel Pump
69 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1 PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
70 Climate Control Blower REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
71 Power Liftgate Module RUN/CRANK Switched Power
72 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
5-123
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
4.8L V8 17.8 qt 16.9 L
5.3L V8 18.3 qt 17.3 L
6.0L V8 1500 Series 17.9 qt 16.9 L
6.0L V8 2500 Series 17.4 qt 16.5 L
Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt† 5.7 L†
Fuel Tank
Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 L
Extended 1500 Series 31.5 gal 119.2 L
Extended 2500 Series 39.0 gal 147.6 L
5-124
Capacities
Application
English Metric
Transmission Fluid
4L70-E Super Duty Transmission and 4L60-E Electronic 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Transmission
4L80-E Transmission 7.7 qt 7.3 L
6L90-Transmission 6.3 qt 6.0 L
Transfer Case Fluid 2.0 qt 1.9 L
Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper
operating range.
5-125
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Iron Block)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™ 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Aluminum Block)
5.3L V8 with Active Fuel
J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Management™ (Iron Block)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 with Active
Fuel Management™ Y Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)
(Aluminum Block)
5-126
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-15
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
Introduction vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
change as recommended. affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule

We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
dealer/retailer for details. vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Maintenance Requirements Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
following and note how you drive. If you have any
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
see your dealer/retailer.
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended CAUTION: (Continued)
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle for the job. If you have any doubt, see your
on page 4-35. dealer/retailer to have a qualified technician do
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work
driving limits. on page 5-4.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
Off-Road Driving on page 4-13. Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane on unless you are technically qualified and have the
page 5-5. necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional needs, you will know that trained and supported service
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
{CAUTION: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
can be seriously injured. Do your own on page 6-13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
maintenance work only if you have the required page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
know-how and the proper tools and equipment these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message required. Required services are described in the
comes on, it means that service is required for your following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible Generally, it is recommended that your first service be
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and may be required more often.
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within
trained service technicians who will perform this work 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or
using genuine parts and reset the system. Maintenance II was performed.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See 10 months or more since the last service or if the
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information on message has not come on at all for one year.
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life
• •
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. • •
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-75 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month • •
on page 6-10.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
• •
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
• • • • • •
leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
• • • • • •
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
• • •
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-19.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
• • •
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
•
filter (normal service).
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case
• • •
fluid. See footnote (g).
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service. • • •
See footnotes † and (k).
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires. An Emission Control •
Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. •
See footnote (m).
Maintenance Footnotes # Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and

parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the 2500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not be
California Air Resources Board has determined that the lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F (−12°C) or
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify higher, or they could be damaged. Control arm ball joints
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the on 1500 series vehicles are maintenance-free.
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
6-7
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, on page 1-92.
parking brake, etc. (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks. frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test (g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the proper installation.
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
recommended at least once a year. vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or conditions:
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on − In hilly or mountainous terrain.
page 5-61 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 5-111 for more information. − When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
service.
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
6-8
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service Owner Checks and Services
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 These owner checks and services should be performed
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test dependability, and emission control performance of your
the cooling system and pressure cap. vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed. At Each Fuel Fill
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect It is important to perform these underhood checks at
the filter at each engine oil change. each fuel fill.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or Engine Oil Level Check
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
6-9
Engine Coolant Level Check At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant Starter Switch Check
on page 5-28.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check {CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if When you are doing this inspection, the
necessary. vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
Tire Inflation Check around the vehicle.
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-43.
check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86. turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
Tire Wear Inspection should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service your dealer/retailer for service.
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-75.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Ignition Transmission Lock Check
Control System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
{CAUTION: • The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only

when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
When you are doing this inspection, the • The ignition key should come out only in
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle LOCK/OFF.
moves, you or others could be injured. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room

around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-43.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-11
Parking Brake and Automatic Hood and Liftgate Support Gas Strut
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check Service
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check the
{CAUTION: hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary, replace with
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
Underbody Flushing Service
injured and property could be damaged. Make At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin can collect.
to move. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Check the sealant expiration date printed on the
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing instruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the Kit (if equipped) at least once a year. See your
parking brake. dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
6-12
Recommended Fluids and Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Lubricants Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System in Canada 89021186).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your Automatic DEXRON®-VI Automatic
dealer/retailer. Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Cylinders (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays Chassis Lubricant
the American Petroleum Institute Chassis (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Engine Oil Certified for Gasoline Engines in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s Category LB or GC-LB.
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15. Front Axle
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable (1500 Series SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
® Vehicles with (GM Part No. U.S. 89021671,
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL Four-Wheel in Canada 89021672).
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-28. Drive)
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. (2500 Series Axle Lubricant
Vehicles with (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Windshield Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Four-Wheel in Canada 89021678) meeting
Washer Drive) GM Specification 9986115.
6-13
Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Axle Lubricant Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Rear Axle (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 10953474).
in Canada 89021678) meeting Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
GM Specification 9986115. Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Points in Canada 10953474).
(Four-Wheel Weatherstrip Lubricant
Drive) Transmission Fluid.
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Front Axle Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Propshaft Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
Spline or Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
One-Piece (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 992887).
Propshaft in Canada 10953511) or Synthetic Grease with
Spline lubricant meeting requirements of Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
(Two-Wheel GM 9985830. Squeaks (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
Drive with in Canada 10953437).
Auto. Trans.)
6-14
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts

ACDelco® Part
Part GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner /Filter
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Standard Filter 15908916 A3086C*
Oil Filter 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm) 15930910 —
Rear – 11.8 inches (30.0 cm) 15173728 —
*A3085C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing

6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-18
6-19
6-20
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4 United States Government ..........................7-14
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Reporting Safety Defects to the
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-5 Canadian Government ................................7-14
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-14
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-7 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-16
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9 OnStar® ......................................................7-17
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11 Navigation System ........................................7-17
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-17
7-1
Customer Assistance and We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
Information following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your top left of the instrument panel and visible through
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the the windshield.
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be • Dealership name and location.
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern (kilometers).
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
steps should be taken: concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be have a concern.
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
contact the owner of the dealership or the general completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
manager. you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file
management, it appears your concern cannot be with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the Program to enforce your rights.
U.S., contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre by to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(French).
7-2
Although you may be required to resort to this informal The program provides for the review of the facts involved
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
use of the program is free of charge and your case will informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you. should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following charge.
address:
BBB Auto Line Program For further information concerning eligibility in the
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
4200 Wilson Boulevard toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call the
Suite 800 General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to:
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District c/o Customer Communication Centre
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, General Motors of Canada Limited
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to Mail Code: CA1-163-005
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
participation in this program. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that Your inquiry should be accompanied by your Vehicle
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed Identification Number (VIN).
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
7-3
Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
(United States only) gmcanada.com where you can save information on
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in tools and forms with greater ease.
one place. Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
The Online Owner Center allows you to: will have access to:
• Get e-mail service reminders. − My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Access information about your specific vehicle, − My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
including tips and videos and an electronic address and phone number for each of your
version of this owner manual. preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and − My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
maintenance schedule. helpful advice on owning and maintaining
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide. your vehicle.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only − My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe
to E-News and use tools and forms with
available to members.
greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
information and to register your vehicle.
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
Telephone (TTY) Users 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: Canada — Customer Assistance
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.) General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free www.gmcanada.com
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes 1-800-263-3777 (English)
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be 1-800-263-7854 (French)
addressed to: 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Overseas — Customer Assistance GM Mobility Reimbursement
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares This program, available to qualified applicants, can
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
01-800-508-0000 aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY)
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Roadside Assistance Program • Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438). security, the driver must present personal
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800. identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Assistance program. Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
Who is Covered? mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
is not eligible for coverage. by a warrantable failure.
Services Provided • Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
The following services are provided in the U.S. and charge if the vehicle does not start.
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), • Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request,
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up to a Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
maximum coverage of $100. computer personalized maps, highlighting your
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle choice of either the most direct route or the most
to get to the nearest service station (approximately scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
$5 in Canada). In Canada, service to provide diesel America, along with helpful travel information
may be restricted. For safety reasons, propane and pertaining to your trip.
other alternative fuels will not be provided through Please allow three weeks before your planned
this service. departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited
to six per calendar year.
7-7
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
vehicle disablement, while en route and over repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
250 kilometres from the original point of departure, Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
you may qualify for trip interruption expense reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500 claims become excessive in frequency or type of
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day), occurrence.
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of Calling for Assistance
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
for your vehicle to be repaired.
Representative:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and a
copy of the repair order are required. • Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and • Telephone number of your location
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense • Location of the vehicle
assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
secure local emergency road service, and you will be (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the • Description of the problem
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
7-8
Towing and Road Service Exclusions If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance the work day as possible to allow for the same
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on day repair.
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or Courtesy Transportation
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
Roadside Assistance program at any time without in both the U.S. and Canada.
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
Scheduling Service Appointments repairs are required.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
scheduling a service appointment and advising your and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
service consultant of your transportation needs, your each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-9
Transportation Options Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
minimize your inconvenience by providing several that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
your dealer can offer you one of the following: and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
Shuttle Service and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
the completion of the repair.
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
Public Transportation or Fuel courtesy rental.
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and Additional Program Information
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for Transportation arrangements will be administered
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation by appropriate dealer personnel.
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
original receipts. See your dealer for information time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at
fuel or other transportation costs. its sole discretion.
7-10
Collision Damage Repair Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
technician using the proper equipment and quality and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
performance can be compromised in subsequent to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
collisions.
Repair Facility
Collision Parts
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with facility that meets your needs before you ever need
the same materials and construction methods as the collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can and comparable equipment.
help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
7-11
Insuring Your Vehicle If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There • Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs • If there has been an injury, call emergency services
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you only if its position puts you in danger or you are
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original instructed to move it by a police officer.
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is • Give only the necessary and requested information
not available from your current insurance carrier,
to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with help guard against post-crash legal action.
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
of your lease for poor quality repairs. page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
• Gather the important information you will need from Managing the Vehicle Damage
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone Repair Process
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and GM recommends that you take an active role in its
policy number, and a general description of the repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
damage to the other vehicle. choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the Specify to the facility that any required replacement
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
information they will need. If they ask for a police Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
report, phone or go to the police department Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of GM vehicle warranty.
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
necessary. This is especially true if there are no insurance company may initially value the repair using
injuries and both vehicles are driveable. aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
their work for a long time. repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
make sure you understand what work will be that company. In such cases, you can have control of the
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question, repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome reasonable limits.
this opportunity.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
United States Government has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
could cause a crash or could cause injury or Transport Canada
death, you should immediately inform the National Road Safety Branch
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in 2780 Sheffield Road
addition to notifying General Motors. Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect Reporting Safety Defects to
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall General Motors
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors. a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Chevrolet Motor Division
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: P.O. Box 33170
Administrator, NHTSA Detroit, MI 48232-5170
400 Seventh Street, SW. In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
Washington D.C., 20590 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
You can also obtain other information about motor General Motors of Canada Limited
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-14
Service Publications Ordering Current and Past Model Order Forms
Information Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
Service Manuals an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Service Bulletins Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
information needed to knowledgeably service General World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of Or you can write to:
your vehicle. Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Owner Information Detroit, MI 48207
Owner publications are written specifically for owners Prices are subject to change without notice and without
and intended to provide basic operational information incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and checks payable in U.S. funds.
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Event Data Recorders
Privacy This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
computers that record information about the vehicle’s deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
performance and how it is driven. For example, assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
modules may also store data about how you operate the belts were buckled/fastened
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average • How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
accelerator and/or brake pedal
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings. • How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
7-16
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is Navigation System
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special system may result in the storage of destinations,
equipment, can read the information if they have access addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
to the vehicle or the EDR. information. Refer to the navigation system operating
GM will not access this data or share it with others manual for information on stored data and for deletion
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the instructions.
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar Radio Frequency Identification
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law. (RFID)
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
GM research needs or may be made available to others
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
OnStar® openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the GM system containing personal information.
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-60 in this
manual for more information.
7-17
✍ NOTES
7-18
A Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-112
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-109
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-41 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-114
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-110
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-91 Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-108
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Finish Care ............................................... 5-110
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-116 Finish Damage .......................................... 5-113
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-29 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19 Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-109
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-23, 3-26 Interior Cleaning ........................................ 5-106
Airbag Leather .................................................... 5-108
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-41 Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-113
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-40 Tires ........................................................ 5-113
Airbag System ................................................ 1-76 Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-113
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-84 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-114
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-82 Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-110
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-79 Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-109
Airbag Systems Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-111
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-9
Vehicle ................................................... 1-91 Ashtray ......................................................... 3-23
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-84 Audio System ................................................. 3-82
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-86 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-124
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-90 Navigation/Radio System,
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-83 see Navigation Manual ............................ 3-112
Antenna, Rear Side Window ........................... 3-126 Radio Reception ........................................ 3-125
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-122
Antenna System ........................................ 3-126 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-83
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-124
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-46 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-126
1
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-85 Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Rear Side Window Antenna ......................... 3-126 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-60
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-18 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Automatic Transmission Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-58
Fluid .................................................. 5-22, 5-24 Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-78
Operation ................................................... 2-31
Autoride® ....................................................... 4-49
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch ................. 3-19 C
Calibration ............................................. 2-49, 2-52
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
B California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
Battery .......................................................... 5-45 California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-21 Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-21 Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-124
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................. 1-12 Carbon Monoxide ........... 2-13, 2-15, 2-47, 4-30, 4-49
Brake Care of
Emergencies ................................................ 4-6 Safety Belts .............................................. 5-109
Brakes .......................................................... 5-42 Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-73
System Warning Light .................................. 3-45 CD, MP3 ............................................ 3-102, 3-106
Braking ........................................................... 4-4 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-71
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-6 Center Seat ................................................... 1-11
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-26 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-84
Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-18 Charging System Light .................................... 3-43
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-58 Check
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-58 Engine Light ............................................... 3-48
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-55 Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-60 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-114
2
Child Restraints Climate Control System ................................... 3-23
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-57 Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-26
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-54 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-61 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-33
Older Children ............................................. 1-51 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Securing a Child Restraint in a Electronic ................................................ 3-35
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-70 Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-83
Securing a Child Restraint in the Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Center Front Seat Position ........................ 1-72 Compass ............................................... 2-49, 2-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-22
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-72 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-60 Coolant
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-23 Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-47
Cleaning Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-30
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-112 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-31
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-110 Cooling System .............................................. 5-34
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-108 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12
Finish Care ............................................... 5-110 Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-53
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-71
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 5-109 Customer Assistance Information
Interior ..................................................... 5-106 Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9
Leather .................................................... 5-108 Customer Assistance for Text
Tires ........................................................ 5-113 Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-5
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-113 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-110 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-109 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-111 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Driving
Reporting Safety Defects to the At Night ..................................................... 4-26
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14 Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-28
Reporting Safety Defects to the Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
United States Government ......................... 7-14 Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-7 Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-28
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-28
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-26
Off-Road .................................................... 4-13
D Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-34
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-34
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-17
Winter ........................................................ 4-30
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-26
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-11
DVD
Disc, MP3 .......................................... 3-102, 3-106
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-113
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-20
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-20
Door E
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11 EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Locks ........................................................ 2-10 Electrical System
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11 Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-116
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-119
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-117
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-55 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-118
DIC Operation and Displays .................. 3-56, 3-62 Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5-117
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-73 Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-120
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-65 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-117
4
Engine Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-85
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-19 Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-86
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-48 Flat Tire, Storing ........................................... 5-102
Coolant ...................................................... 5-28 Fluid ..................................................... 5-22, 5-24
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-30 Power Steering ........................................... 5-39
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-47 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-40
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-16 Fog Lamp
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-14 Fog ........................................................... 3-18
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-47 Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-53
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-39 Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-38, 5-52
Oil ............................................................. 5-15 Front Axle ...................................................... 5-53
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18 Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-33 Additives ...................................................... 5-6
Overheating ................................................ 5-31 California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Running While Parked .................................. 2-48 E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-7
Starting ...................................................... 2-28 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-11
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-20 Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-9
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-16 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-8
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-20 Gage ......................................................... 3-54
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-50 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-16 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-55
Fuses
F Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-119
Filter Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-117
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-118
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-113 Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-120
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6 Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-117
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
5
G Headlamps (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-58
Gage High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-47 On Reminder .............................................. 3-17
Fuel .......................................................... 3-54 Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-51 Heater ........................................................... 3-23
Speedometer .............................................. 3-39 Heater ........................................................... 3-26
Tachometer ................................................. 3-39 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-53
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-44 Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-28
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-64 Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-28
Gasoline Hood
Octane ........................................................ 5-5 Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12
Specifications ............................................... 5-5 Release ..................................................... 5-12
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-71 Horn ............................................................... 3-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-35
H I
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-26
Head Restraints .............................................. 1-10 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-54
Headlamp Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-70
Aiming ....................................................... 5-55 Instrument Panel
Headlamps Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-58 Instrument Panel (I/P)
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-17 Brightness .................................................. 3-19
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16 Cluster ....................................................... 3-38
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
6
J Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-40
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-46 Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-46
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-45
Charging System ......................................... 3-43
K Cruise Control ............................................. 3-53
Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-53
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3 Highbeam On ............................................. 3-53
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-55
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-48
L Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-52
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-41
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-64 Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-39
Lamps Security ..................................................... 3-52
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ........................ 3-19 StabiliTrak® Indicator .................................... 3-46
Dome ........................................................ 3-20 Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-47
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-20 Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-53
Reading ..................................................... 3-20 Lighting
Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-49 Entry ......................................................... 3-20
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-43 Exit ........................................................... 3-20
LATCH System Lights
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-61 Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-16
Level Control .................................................. 4-48 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-60 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
Liftgate, Power ............................................... 2-15 On Reminder .............................................. 3-17
Liftgate/Liftglass .............................................. 2-13 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-35
Liftglass/Liftgate .............................................. 2-13 Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-6
7
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12 Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Locks Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-11 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Door .......................................................... 2-10 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-12 Using .......................................................... 6-2
Power Door ................................................ 2-11 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-11 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-48
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12 Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-11 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-55 Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-72 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ...................... 1-6
Lumbar Message
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-65
Power Controls ............................................. 1-4 Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-52
M Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-49
Maintenance Schedule
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-57
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-57
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-57
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-54
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-56
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-55
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ........................... 2-54
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17
Park Tilt ..................................................... 2-57
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-15
MP3 .................................................. 3-102, 3-106
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
8
N Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-57
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-17 Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-57
Navigation/Radio System, Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-57
see Navigation Manual ............................... 3-112 Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-54
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-26 Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-56
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-55
Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................................... 2-54
O Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-33
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Odometer ...................................................... 3-39
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-39 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-13
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil P
Engine ....................................................... 5-15 Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-113
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-51 Park Aid ........................................................ 2-58
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-52 Park Brake .................................................... 2-43
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18 Park (P)
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-51 Shifting Into ................................................ 2-44
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-46
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-17 Park Tilt Mirrors .............................................. 2-57
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-60 Parking
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-64 Assist ........................................................ 2-58
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-46
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-33 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-41
Outlets Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-86
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-22 Passing ......................................................... 4-11
9
PASS-Key® III+ .............................................. 2-24 Radios (cont.)
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ................................ 2-24 Reception ................................................. 3-125
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ....... 5-4 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-83
Power Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-124
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11 Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-10
Electrical System ....................................... 5-117 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-20
Liftgate ...................................................... 2-15 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-33
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-27 and Electronic Climate Controls ..................... 3-35
Running Boards .......................................... 2-18 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-51
Seat ............................................................ 1-3 Locking ........................................................ 4-6
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-39 Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Windows .................................................... 2-20 Rear Heated Seats ......................................... 1-11
Privacy .......................................................... 7-16 Rear Seat Armrest .......................................... 2-73
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-16 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-122
Navigation System ....................................... 7-17 Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-113
OnStar ....................................................... 7-17 Rear Side Window Antenna ............................ 3-126
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-17 Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-73
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-11 Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-12
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-52
R Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy ...... 7-17 OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-49
Radios .......................................................... 3-82 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-8
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-85 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Radios Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-34
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-45
Manual ................................................. 3-112 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-122 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ..... 2-5
10
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-8 Safety Belts (cont.)
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-49
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-92 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-43
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-87 Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-50
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-60 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-49
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-15 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-30
Reporting Safety Defects Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14 Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
General Motors ........................................... 7-14 Seats
United States Government ............................ 7-14 60/40 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-12
Restraint System Check Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-18
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-92 Center Seat ................................................ 1-11
Replacing Restraint System Parts Head Restraints .......................................... 1-10
After a Crash .......................................... 1-93 Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-27 Heated Seats - Rear .................................... 1-11
Roadside Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-7 Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ........................... 1-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-34 Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-4
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16 Power Seats ................................................. 1-3
Running Boards, Power ................................... 2-18 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-8
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-48 Third Row Seat ........................................... 1-25
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-98
Securing a Child Restraint
S Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-72
Safety Belt Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-70
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-39 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-72
Safety Belts Security Light ................................................. 3-52
Care of .................................................... 5-109
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-35
11
Service ........................................................... 5-3 Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-124
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5 Storage Areas
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements ..... 5-4 Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-71
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-71
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 Glove Box .................................................. 2-71
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-48 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-72
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15 Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-73
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9 Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-90 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-33
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-113 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-21
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-44 Sunroof ......................................................... 2-74
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-46
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Snow Plow .................................................... 4-41
Spare Tire .................................................... 5-106
T
Installing .................................................... 5-92 Tachometer .................................................... 3-39
Removing ................................................... 5-87 Taillamps
Storing ..................................................... 5-102 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-58
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-124 Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-124
Speedometer .................................................. 3-39 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-22
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................. 1-12 Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-22
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-6 PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-24
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ................................ 3-46 PASS-Key® III+ Operation ............................. 2-24
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-8 Third Row Seat .............................................. 1-25
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-28 Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-83
12
Tire Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-37
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-47 Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-53
Tires ............................................................. 5-63 Towing
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-45
Cleaning ............................................... 5-112 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-49
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-78 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-45
Chains ....................................................... 5-84 Traction
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-86 StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-6
Cleaning ................................................... 5-113 Trailer
Different Size .............................................. 5-80 Recommendations ....................................... 4-63
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-85 Transmission
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-70 Fluid, Automatic .................................. 5-22, 5-24
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-75 Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-31
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-92 Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-39
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-73 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-71 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-92
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-87
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-98
Spare Tire ................................................ 5-106
U
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .......... 5-102 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 2-58
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-64 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-80
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-67 Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-80 Operation ................................................... 2-64
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-82 Using this Manual ............................................... iii
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-77
13
V Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-82
Vehicle Different Size .............................................. 5-80
Control ........................................................ 4-3 Replacement ............................................... 5-82
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-60
Loading ...................................................... 4-35 Windows ....................................................... 2-19
Symbols ......................................................... iv Power ........................................................ 2-20
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-73 Windshield
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16 Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-111
Vehicle Identification Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 3-10
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-115 Washer ...................................................... 3-11
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-116 Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-40
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-8 Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-61
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-33 Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-117
Visors ........................................................... 2-21 Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-44 Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-12
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-30
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-37 X
Warnings XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-111
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-65 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-126
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14

2008 Chevrolet Tahoe Owners PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Chevrolet Tahoe Owners PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Chevrolet Tahoe Owners PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety features are discussed for seats and restraint systems?

What safety features are discussed for seats and restraint systems?

What vehicle features and controls are covered?

What vehicle features and controls are covered?

2008 Chevrolet Tahoe, Suburban Owner Manual M

There are a number of safety cautions in this book.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,

If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the

The seatback will fold forward automatically.

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is

The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback

2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the

2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s)

Third Row Seat

Returning the Third Row Seat from a {CAUTION:

6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

A: The belt is behind the body.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the

You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under

children, but not for young children and

i (Top Tether Anchor):

Second Row — Bucket

i (Top Tether Anchor):

Third Row — Three

For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat, there

If the position you are If the position you are

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different

Do not use child restraints in the center front seat

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this

{CAUTION: • If you have air outlets on or under the

On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the

Window Lockout Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror

Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

C (ON/RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the

Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal

Your vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

{CAUTION: • Repairs were not done correctly.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a